JP7158773B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine that executes a special game when a predetermined lottery is won, and shifts to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player with the special game as a trigger,
In the middle of the special game, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the number of times of continuation, which is the number of times the advantageous game state continues, and
In the notification effect, an increase in the numerical value until the number of continuations is reached is displayed using a meter image, and a meter image enlargement effect for enlarging the meter image is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the details of the big winning device. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table and the like. FIG. 10 is a first diagram for explaining a hit type determination table; FIG. 10 is a second diagram for explaining a hit type determination table; It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol hit determination table and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating an electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the big winning a prize opening pattern determination table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit determination process. It is the first flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is the second flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. 4 is a flowchart of game state management processing 1; It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. 9 is a flowchart of game state management processing 2; It is a figure for demonstrating the setting table of a time saving counter. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. 10 is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 10 is a first flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2. FIG. 10 is a second flowchart of special electric accessary product processing 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member control processing; 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an advance direction movement of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of the illumination panel 18; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a light emitting effect of a frame lamp 66; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the decorative member 10; FIG. 11 is a first explanatory diagram illustrating movement in the advance direction of the third movable accessory 17; FIG. 11 is a second explanatory diagram illustrating movement in the advance direction of the third movable accessory 17; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the role combination production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display content change effect A when a condition is satisfied; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display content change effect B when a condition is satisfied; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display content change effect C when a condition is satisfied; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an icon display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an icon display effect C; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hit type expectation degree suggestion production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hit type expectation degree suggestion production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hit type expectation degree suggestion production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon delay display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon delay display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon delay display effect C; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the number-of-time-savings information production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the number-of-hours-savings information production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the number-of-hours-savings information production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design irregular start stop production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative-design irregular start stop production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design irregular start stop production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a scroll background effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a scroll background effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a scroll background effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image superimposition button effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image superimposition button effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image superimposition button effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character selection effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character selection effect C; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display production|presentation A by the production|presentation apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display production|presentation B by the production|presentation apparatus. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect C by the effect device;

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine The structure of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the details of the big winning device 36. As shown in FIG. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Also, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a select button 68 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. be. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. , fixed prize winning device (navel) 19, first variable prize winning device 31, second variable prize winning device 22, gate (through chucker) 28, electric chew 29, electric chew prize opening 34, big prize winning device ( Attacker) 36, a general winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 27, an out opening 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game pegs for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is also provided inside each of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15, and the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15 are provided. is configured to be capable of emitting light in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) and a reserved image in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a pending digested image display area in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending and is also called the pending icon. The pending icon and the pending icon are collectively referred to simply as the pending icon or icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A middle effect pattern 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big win and small win lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the result of the jackpot and small win lottery by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. In addition, when a small win is won, the production pattern may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance number such as "135", or the production pattern may be stopped and displayed at a random number. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as “variation effect of effect symbols”, or simply “variation effect” or “variation display”. It should be noted that, in this decorative design variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special design starts to change until it is fixed and stopped (also called the special design variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). . Therefore, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they are fixed and stopped, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on a display screen 7a, a big winning performance performed in parallel with a big winning game (second special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The reserved digested image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the suspended digested image 9C, the first special figure suspension or the second special figure suspension It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that is digested ("digestion of special figure reservation" described later).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, first board movable bodies 14 (also referred to as first movable accessories 14), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semi-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( advance) and stop at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7 .

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the image display device 7 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which the game balls flow in and an exit part from which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53 , and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18 . That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 , and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18 . The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating LED light from the end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of images in a plurality of colors depending on the direction and color of light emitted from the LEDs.

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and has a first starting port (first starting prize winning port, first ball entry port, fixed starting port) 20 . Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for acquisition of a special symbol per random number or the like and determination of a big hit.

The first variable prize winning device 31 is arranged below the gate 28 in the game area 3 and has a first starting port (first starting prize winning port, first ball entry port) 30 . The first starting port 30 includes an opening/closing member (first starting port opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first non-electric accessory 33 . A game ball can enter the first starting port 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 30 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 30 is a trigger for acquisition of a special symbol per random number or the like and determination of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3 and has a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second ball entry opening, variable starting opening) 21 . Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is a trigger for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The second variable winning device 22 has a movable member 23 that can advance and retreat back and forth, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by the second non-electric accessory 24 . A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state (advanced state). In addition, the second variable prize winning device 22 only needs to make it easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state). Sometimes it may be possible to enter the second starting port 21 .

A gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 serves as a trigger for a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to drive the electric chew 29 to open the electric chew winning opening 34 . In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of the random number per normal symbol and the determination of the hit.

The electric chew 29 is a movable member arranged below the gate 28 and capable of moving back and forth, and opens and closes the electric chew winnings opening 34 by advancing and retreating. A game ball can enter the electric chew winning port 34 when the electric chew 29 is in an open state (advancing state), and it is difficult for a game ball to enter when the electric chew 29 is in a closed state (retreat state).

The electronic chew prize-winning port 34 includes a first prize-winning port 75, a second prize-winning port 76, and a distribution member 77 (see FIG. 14). A game ball entered into the electronic chew prize-winning port 34 enters either the first prize-winning port 75 or the second prize-winning port 76 by the sorting member 77 . When the ball enters the first winning hole 75, the first non-electric accessory 33 is driven by the weight of the entered game ball, and the opening/closing member 32 is opened. As a result, the first starting hole 30 is brought into a state in which the ball can be entered. When a game ball enters the first starting port 30, the opening/closing member 32 is closed by the weight of the game ball that has entered. When the ball enters the second winning hole 76, the second non-electric accessory 24 is driven by the weight of the entered game ball, and the movable member 23 is opened. As a result, the second starting hole 21 becomes ready for ball entry. When the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the movable member 23 is closed by the weight of the entered game ball. The first non-electrical accessory 33 and the second non-electrical accessory 24 are so-called non-electric chews. The distribution member 77 distributes the game balls so that the game balls entering the electronic chew prize-winning port 34 enter either the first prize-winning port 75 or the second prize-winning port 76.例文帳に追加

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins the first start port 20, 30 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is set in advance. It refers to the process of determining whether it is a big hit or not, and whether it is a small hit or not by comparing with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big hit" or "small hit". The lottery result of this "big win" and "small win" is not immediately notified to the player, and the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later. After a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

A big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged below the first starting port 30 in the game area 3 and has a big winning port (special winning port) 35 . The big winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a shutter-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a big winning opening solenoid 38 . A game ball can enter the big winning opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The big winning device 36 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a, a big winning opening sensor 35a, and a V area sensor 39a. An opening/closing member 71 and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 are provided. The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the big winning device 36 through which game balls that have passed through the big winning hole 35 can pass. The big winning hole sensor 35 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of a game ball into the big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the big winning opening 35 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 is positioned at the origin when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state).

FIG. 2A shows the state when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (first state) in which passage of the game ball to the V region 39 is permitted. When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 35 passes through the big winning hole sensor 35a and then through the V area 39 (route A in FIG. 2(A)). The route of this game ball is called "first route". FIG. 2B shows the state when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (second state) that prevents passage of the game ball to the V region 39 . When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 35 passes through the large winning opening sensor 35a, rolls on the upper surface of the V opening/closing member 71, and passes through the non-V area 70. (Route B in FIG. 2(B)). This game ball route is called a "second route". In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 serves as a trigger for execution of a jackpot game (second special game) described later. In other words, the winning lottery for the big hit is also performed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the V region 39 successfully. The jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol is also called "1st kind jackpot", and the jackpot won by passing the game ball to the V area 39 is also called "2nd kind jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1 , two normal winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . It should be noted that the number of normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the first starting hole 30, the second starting hole 21, and the big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting ports 20 and 30.例文帳に追加The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 performs a lottery (special symbol The results of winning lottery, big winning small winning lottery) are reported. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the big prize opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). A jackpot game (second special game) is performed. In addition, when the stop pattern is a special pattern (small winning pattern) of a predetermined small winning stop mode, an opening pattern according to the type of the stopped small winning pattern (type of winning small winning) is used. A small winning game (first special game) for opening the big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the big winning opening 35 in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. Also, if you win a small win (one of the multiple types of small wins described later), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left will light up like "●●●●○○●●". Display the small winning pattern. In addition, if the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, 30 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), various random number values ( Numerical information) is once stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, 30, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as a first special figure reservation, and a prize to the second start opening 21 If there is, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. The number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85 has an upper limit. There are four 85b. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is digested when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extraction of special figure reservation" means to determine the special symbol per random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20, 30 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbols or during execution of a special game (big win game or small win game), the right of a big win/small win lottery for the win can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The first special figure reservation indicator 43a is made up of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is made up of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning pattern), the first start port 30 and the second start are opened in an open pattern according to the current game state. An auxiliary game for opening the mouth 21 is performed. The opening pattern of the first starting port 30 and the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern is displayed in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit, such as "○○●" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the LED in the middle is illuminated, such as "●○●", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for the passage is temporarily stored as a normal pattern retention storage area 86 (FIG. 6). be. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is one. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number per normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern for showing the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LED by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and an audio control board 106 ( 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control relating to game profits such as a big win and small win lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start sensor 20a, the second start sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first start sensor 30a, the big winning sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, The non-V area sensor 70a and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. They are connected through a relay board 88 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first starting hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first starting hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 30 . The big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 35 . The V-area sensor 39 a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the big winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V-area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the big winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 .

Examples of the solenoids include the electric tuning solenoid 29a, the distribution member solenoid 77a, the winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The electric tuning solenoid 29 a drives the electric tuning 29 . The distribution member solenoid 77 a drives the distribution member 77 . The big winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the big winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the big winning opening 35 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 5 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the production as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . etc. is output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 via the lamp control substrate 107 based on the command received from the main control substrate 80. ) and other lamp lighting control. In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls these movable accessories according to the motion pattern data. control behavior. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessory based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute the light emitting effect via the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6A) contains a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. , a normal symbol winning type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a big winning opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands to be output from the main control section to the sub-control section are set in the main control main processing (described later). Command, Round designation command, Ending command, Game state designation command, V pass command, Pre-judgment command, Waiting for customers command, Hold number of balls command, Normal pattern fluctuation start command, Normal pattern fluctuation stop command, Normal pattern opening command, Normal Design ending command etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later). A flag, a ceiling flag, a time saving flag, a V opening/closing member operation flag, etc. are set. Counter set area 84c is an area where a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, such as a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a first time saving counter, a second time saving counter, a third time saving counter, etc. is set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set in a special action process (FIG. 20) to be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the first to fourth storage areas for storing random number groups (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding respectively to the first to fourth items of the first special figure reservation is provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with first to fourth storage areas for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first to fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per normal pattern corresponding to the first general pattern reservation. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a driving data buffer in which driving data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like. It is The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information described above do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Also, as the initial state of the counters, a predetermined value (eg, 500) is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 7A) stores a variable performance pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a time-saving performance scenario determination table T54, and a prefetch performance pattern determination table T55. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control section are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), and includes a variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , ending command, game state designation command, V passing command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting command, number of held balls command, normal pattern fluctuation start command, normal pattern fluctuation stop command, normal pattern opening command, normal pattern ending command, etc. Stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106 are set in the sub-control main process (described later). Yes, variable production start command, variable production end command, opening production start command, round production start command, ending production start command, normal design fluctuation production start command, normal design fluctuation production end command, normal design opening production start command, normal design An ending effect start command and the like are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , a first time-saving effect counter, a second time-saving effect counter, a third time-saving effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, and the like are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight performance counter (not shown) is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the late-night production counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The overnight performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the game machine 1, and 0 is set as an initial state. Information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to a predetermined value (eg, 500) and the other counters are set to 0 as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 8B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 provides "random number per special symbol", "random number per special symbol type", "reach random number", "variation pattern random number", "random number per normal symbol", and "type per normal symbol". A random number” is obtained at timings described later. The "special symbol random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big win and small win lottery) for big win, small win, loss (sudden reduction in working hours), and loss, and takes a value in the range of 0-65535. The "special symbol per type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (hit type determination) of the type of winning big win or small win, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit and small win determination is a loss, and is in the range of 0 to 127. takes the value of Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Normal symbol random number" is a random number used in a winning lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the first variable winning device 31 and the second variable winning device 22, and ranges from 0 to 255. takes a value in the range of "Normal symbol type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (hit type determination) of the type of winning in the normal symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ``Random number per special symbol'', ``Random number per special symbol type'', ``Reach random number'', and ``Variation pattern random number'' are acquired based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). be done. The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Random number per normal symbol” and “Random number per normal symbol type” are acquired based on passage through the gate 28 . The acquired normal per symbol random number value and normal per symbol type random number value are stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The production control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "fluctuation production pattern random number", a "time-saving production scenario random number", and a "forecast production random number" at the timing described later. The “fluctuation effect pattern random number” is a random number used for determining the fluctuation effect pattern, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. ``Random number for look-ahead effect'' is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect at the time of variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "fluctuation effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the output of a fluctuation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the ready-to-win determination table T2. FIG. 9(A) shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9(B) shows a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win determination table T2.

In the special symbol hit determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires special symbol random numbers (any of 0 to 65535) in the main control main process (described later). (sudden reduction in working hours)” or “losing”. In FIG. 9 (A), in the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the random number per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the random number per special symbol is " 10000 to 10500", it is determined as "small hit", and when the random number per special symbol is "20000 to 22100", it is determined as "losing (sudden reduction in working hours)", and the random number per special symbol It is indicated that a value other than the above from 0 to 65535 is determined to be "losing". In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the random number value per special symbol is 0 to 65535. In the case of other numerical values, it is determined that it is a "small hit".

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 9 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

Based on FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the special symbol hit type determination table T3 will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the special figure 2 lottery. Special symbol per type determination table T3, game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), according to the special symbol per type random number value (any of 0 to 127), "jackpot type" or " It is a table referred to in order to determine "small hit type" and "type of special symbol". In FIG. 10, when "jackpot winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 1 in "non-time saving state", if the type random number value per special symbol is "0 to 15", the jackpot type is "5R time saving 150 times jackpot ", and the stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol) of the special figure 1 stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a is determined to be "time reduction symbol 1". When the special symbol per type random number value is "16 to 127", the big hit type is determined as "5R time saving 100 times big hit", and the special figure 1 stop design is determined as "time saving design 2". On the other hand, if you win a "small hit" in the special drawing 1 lottery in "non-time saving state", regardless of the type random number per special pattern (any of 0 to 127), the small hit type It is determined as "3R normal small hit (substantially impossible to pass V)", and the special figure 1 stop pattern is determined as "no time saving small hit pattern 1".

When "jackpot winning" is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in "time saving state", the jackpot type is "3R time saving 100 times jackpot" regardless of the type random number per special pattern (any of 0 to 127). It is determined that the special figure 1 stop design is "time saving design 3". On the other hand, if you win a "small hit" in the special drawing 1 lottery in "time saving state", regardless of the type random number per special symbol (any of 0 to 127), the small hit type is " 3R normal small hit (substantial impossibility of V passage)", and the special figure 1 stop pattern is determined to be "no time saving small hit pattern 2".

In FIG. 11, when "jackpot winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "non-time saving state", the jackpot type is "3R Time saving 1 time jackpot" is determined, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (special figure 2 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b is determined as "time saving symbol 1". On the other hand, when "small win" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "non-time saving state", if the type random number per special symbol is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "3R time saving 1 time small Hit (V passable)" is determined, and the special figure 2 stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined to be "a small winning symbol 1 with short working hours" on the second special symbol display 41b. When the special symbol type random number is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "3R normal small hit (V passable)", and the special figure 2 stop design is "no time saving small hit pattern 1". is determined.

When "jackpot winning" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "time saving state", if the type random number value per special symbol is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is "5R time saving 1 time jackpot" It is determined, The special figure 2 stop pattern is determined to be "time saving pattern 2". When the special symbol type random number value is "80 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "3R time saving one time big hit", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined as "time saving pattern 3". On the other hand, when "small winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "time saving state", if the type random number value per special symbol is "0 to 63", the small winning type is "3R time saving 1 time small winning (V passage allowed)", and the special figure 2 stop pattern is determined to be "small hit pattern 2 with short working hours". When the special symbol type random value is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined as "3R normal small hit (V passable)", and the special figure 2 stop design is "no time saving small hit pattern 2". is determined. In addition, by referring to the special symbol per type determination table T3, in addition to the "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol and special figure 2 stop symbol), the special game "opening (OP) command,” “Round designation command,” and “Ending (ED) command” can also be specified. Specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired, table referred to for determining the variation pattern is. In FIG. 12, for example, when the first start ports 20 and 30 are won in the non-time saving state, and the special symbol hit determination table T1 is determined as "big hit", and the variation pattern random value is "111 to 127", It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P2". Also, for example, the first start ports 20 and 30 are won in a non-time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the special symbol per determination table T1, and it is determined as "no reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of pending balls is In the case of "1 to 2", it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be "P6" regardless of the variation pattern random number (any of 0 to 127). Also, for example, when the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state and it is determined as "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number (any of 0 to 127 ), and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P14”. As shown in FIG. 12, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). It is also determined whether or not there is a quasi-ream in the event of a super-reach.

FIG. 13(A) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13(B) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. 13(C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. In the normal symbol hit determination table T5, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "losing". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not it applies. In FIG. 13 (A), in the lottery of the normal pattern (normal pattern) in the "non-time saving state", if the random number value per normal pattern is "0 to 2", it is determined as "hit", and the normal pattern per random If the numerical value is "a numerical value other than the above within the range of 0 to 254", it is determined to be "losing". In the lottery of normal patterns (normal patterns) in the "time saving state", if the random number per normal pattern is "0 to 254", it is determined to be "hit", and the random value per normal pattern is "out of 0 to 254 In the case of "numerical value other than the above", it is determined to be "failed".

Normal per symbol type determination table T6, game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), according to normal per symbol type random number value (any one of 0 to 65535), "hit type" and " It is a table referred to in order to determine the type of normal symbol. In FIG. 13 (B), when winning in the lottery of the normal figure in the "non-time saving state", regardless of the type random number per normal symbol (any of 0 to 65535), the hit type is "short open ”, and the normal pattern stop pattern is determined to be “hit pattern 1”. On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of normal figure in "time saving state", the portion of the determination table T6 to be referred to differs depending on the trigger when the game state becomes the time saving state. Specifically, during the time saving state that is executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery in a time saving (after the big hit), and during b time saving (play time) and c time saving (sudden time saving) When winning in the lottery, as shown in "Special figure 1 time saving state" in FIG. The stop pattern of the normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern) that is determined and stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display 42 is determined as the "hit pattern 2". When the normal pattern per type random number value is "65301 to 65535", the per type is determined as "long open 2", and the normal per pattern stop pattern is determined as "per pattern 3". In the time saving (after the big hit), when winning in the normal lottery during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in "Special figure 2 time saving state" in FIG. 13 (B) In addition, regardless of the type random number per normal symbol (any of 0 to 65535), the per type is determined to be "long open 2", and the stop symbol of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 42 (Normal pattern stop pattern) is determined as "hit pattern 3".

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in order to determine the variation time of the normal pattern according to the lottery result of the normal pattern and the winning type in the main control main process (described later). is. In FIG. 13 (C), for example, the lottery result of the normal pattern in the non-time saving state is "hit", and when the hit type is "short open", the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined as "1 second" is shown. Further, for example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern during the time saving state is "losing", it is shown that the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 according to the normal pattern stop pattern (normal pattern stop pattern data) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 1", the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 is determined to be "open pattern 11", and for example, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 3", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 13".

When the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 is "opening pattern 11", it is difficult for the game ball to win in either the first variable winning device 31 or the second variable winning device 22.例文帳に追加In the case of the "open pattern 12", winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 31 becomes easy, while winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 22 is difficult. In the case of the "open pattern 13", it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first variable winning device 31, but it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 22.例文帳に追加The mechanism is explained below.

FIG. 14B shows the contents of each open pattern 11-13. In the opening pattern 11, after winning the general drawing lottery, the electric chew 29 with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 29 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In the opening pattern 13, the electric tube 29 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 5 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 29 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won.

FIG. 14(C) shows the opening patterns 11 to 13 and the moving direction of the game ball. The electronic chew prize-winning port 34 includes a first prize-winning port 75, a second prize-winning port 76, and a distribution member 77 inside. A game ball entered into the electronic chew prize-winning port 34 enters either the first prize-winning port 75 or the second prize-winning port 76 by the sorting member 77 . The distribution member 77 is in a state in which the game ball enters the first prize winning port 75 and does not enter the second prize winning port 76 for 4 seconds from the opening (OP) time after winning the normal figure lottery (first state). to maintain After that, the direction is changed, and the game ball is prevented from entering the first winning hole 75 for 5 seconds, and the state (second state) in which the ball enters the second winning hole 76 is maintained. After that, the orientation is switched again to enter the first state. In the opening pattern 11, since the opening time (advance position time) of the electric chew 29 is 0.02 seconds, the game ball flowing down the right game area 3B cannot be drawn into the electric chew winning opening . Therefore, even if the electric chew 29 executes the opening pattern 11, the game ball does not enter the electric chew winning opening 34. - 特許庁In the open pattern 12, the electric chew 29 is opened (moved to the advanced position) for 3 seconds after the opening (OP) time of 0.01 second. The distribution member 77 is in the first state in which the game ball enters the first winning port 75 and does not enter the second winning port 76 for 4 seconds from the opening (OP) time, so the electric chew 29 is open. A game ball entered into the electronic chew prize-winning port 34 surely enters the first prize-winning port 75.例文帳に追加When the ball enters the first winning hole 75, the first non-electric accessory 33 is driven by the weight of the entered game ball, and the opening/closing member 32 is opened. As a result, the first starting hole 30 is brought into a state in which the ball can be entered. When a game ball enters the first starting port 30, the opening/closing member 32 is closed by the weight of the game ball that has entered. In the open pattern 13, the electric chew 29 is opened (moved to the advanced position) for 3 seconds after the opening (OP) time of 5 seconds. The distribution member 77 maintains the first state for 4 seconds from the opening (OP) time, then prevents the game ball from entering the first winning hole 75, and enters the second winning hole 76. Since the state is switched, a game ball that enters the electric chew winning opening 34 while the electric chew 29 is open always enters the second winning opening 76. - 特許庁When the ball enters the second winning hole 76, the second non-electric accessory 24 is driven by the weight of the entered game ball, and the movable member 23 is opened. As a result, the second starting hole 21 becomes ready for ball entry. When the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the movable member 23 is closed by the weight of the entered game ball.

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. The large winning hole opening pattern determination table T9 is set by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 15(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H" and "25H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the big winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 21". , When the special figure stop design data is "15H", "21H", "26H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 22", and when the special figure stop design data is "13H", "16H", open The pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "22H", "13H", "27H", "28H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 24". It is

FIG. 15B shows the contents of each of the open patterns 21-24. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the big winning opening 35 is opened once for the opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 5th Rs. The V opening/closing member 71 remains closed. In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the big winning opening 35 is opened once in the 1st to 3rd rounds with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. The V opening/closing member 71 remains closed. In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, the big winning opening 35 is opened once in the 1st to 3rd rounds with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. After the opening (OP), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened/closed at a predetermined timing. In the opening pattern 24, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 seconds, the big winning opening 35 is opened once in the 1st to 3rd rounds with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. After the opening (OP), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened/closed at a predetermined timing. The opening of the big winning opening 35 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 9).

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “big wins”, “small wins”, and “losses” as a result of a special symbol lottery (big win and small win lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "small win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying the "small win symbol". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When a big win is won, a ``big win game (second special game)'' for opening a big prize opening 35 is executed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed (type of big win). When a small win is won, a "small win game (first special game)" is opened once (1Rth) in the opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol displayed stopped (type of small win). )” is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V area 39 inside the big winning hole 35 during execution of the small winning game, the big winning (2nd and 3rd round) in the open pattern according to the type of the winning small winning. A "jackpot game (second special game)" for opening the mouth 35 is executed. Incidentally, the jackpot game that is executed based on the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is the jackpot election is also referred to as "1 type jackpot game". In addition, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is also referred to as "second type jackpot game". Moreover, a big hit game and a small hit game are also called a "special game." This special game may include a round in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round.

The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening game) for opening the big winning opening 35, an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending after the final round game is finished. (ED). Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening 35 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The small winning game includes a small winning opening game for opening the big winning opening 35 for the first time (1Rth), an opening (interval before opening) before the small winning opening game starts, and a small winning opening game ending. a later ending (post-closure interval);

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, "5R time saving 150 times jackpot", "5R time saving 100 times jackpot", "5R time saving 1 time jackpot", and "3R time saving 1 time jackpot" are set. These jackpots are jackpots in which the game state is controlled to a "time saving state and high base state" described later after a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) that opens the jackpot 35 over 5Rs or 3Rs is executed. On the other hand, these hits are different in the number of times of time saving at which the “time saving state and high base state” after the jackpot game ends. Here, the "number of times of time saving" is the number of variable display (variable display) of special symbols that can be executed in the "time saving state and high base state" after the big win game, and is set in advance for each big win type. For example, in the "5R time saving 150 times jackpot", the number of time saving times is 150 times, and in the "5R time saving 100 times jackpot", the number of time saving times is 100 times. It should be noted that the "time saving state and high base state" ends when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed even before the number of times of time saving is achieved.

There are multiple types of small hits. Here, as the types of small hits, "3R normal small hits (V passage is practically impossible)", "3R normal small hits (V passable)", "3R time-saving one-time small hits (V passable)" are set. . In the small winning, first, a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V area 39 (V passage), a big winning game (2 kinds of big winning games) is executed. Therefore, in the small winning game, the opening of the big winning hole 35 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1st round, and the big winning game of opening the big winning hole 35 over 2Rs, which is executed after passing V, is the 2nd round and the 3rd round. corresponds to the eye. When there is no V passage in the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed. Here, "3R normal small hit (substantially impossible to pass V)" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, “3R normal small hit (V passable)” and “3R short time 1 time small hit (V passable)” are small hits that can pass V. Whether or not the V passage during the small winning game is possible can be set by the operating pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 37 of the big winning device 36 . Specifically, it is as follows.

In each of the small wins described above, the big winning opening 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds in the small win game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small winning game differs according to the small winning type. Specifically, "3R normal small hit (V passage virtually impossible)" (open pattern 23) has an opening time of 4 seconds, "5R short time 1 time small hit", "3R time short 1 time small hit", "3R normal small win" (open pattern 23) has an opening time of 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small winning game differs according to the type of the small winning is to change the opening timing of the big winning opening 35 with respect to the V opening/closing member 71 which moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening. be. Here, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for 3 seconds after opening for 0.01 seconds when the small winning game is started. In the open pattern 23, the large winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the start of the small winning game, so the V opening/closing member 71 closes about 1 second before the large winning opening 35 is opened. Therefore, in the "3R normal small win (substantially impossible to pass V)", it is substantially impossible to pass V during the small win game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, the big winning opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are opened at the same time. The winning opening 35 is closed. Therefore, in the "5R time-saving one-time small hit", "3R time-saving one-time small win", and "3R normal small win", it is possible to pass V during the small winning game.

In the gaming machine 1, there are "hit" and "loss" as a result of a normal symbol lottery (hit lottery). In the case of "winning", the "winning design" is stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 42. - 特許庁In the case of "losing", the normal symbol display 42 stops and displays "losing". When a win is won, a "win game (ordinary game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 29 is executed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of normal symbols stopped and displayed (type of win). In this winning game (normal game), the electric chew may be opened multiple times during one round. A winning game (ordinary game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the start of the round game, and an ending (ED) after the end of the round game. . There are multiple types of hits. Here, "long open 1", "long open 2", and "short open" are set as hit types. These hits have different fluctuation times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Description of game state The game control microcomputer 81 of the gaming machine 1 can execute "fluctuation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". ”. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) defined so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more often selected in the time of the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning of the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time shortening control for normal symbols in the time saving state, and does not execute it in the non time saving state.

The game control microcomputer 81 is a time saving (after the big hit), during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery, b time saving (play time), c time saving (sudden time saving). When winning in the lottery shown in the figure, as shown in "Special figure 1 time saving state" in FIG. judge. At the time of "long opening 1", the winning of the first starting port 30 is facilitated and the winning of the second starting port 21 is made difficult. At the time of "long opening 2", the winning of the first starting port 30 is made difficult and the winning of the second starting port 21 is facilitated. Of the time saving (after the big hit), when winning in the normal lottery during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in "Special figure 2 time saving state" in FIG. 13 (B) In addition, the win type is always determined to be ``long open 2'' to make it difficult to win a prize at the first starting port 30 and to facilitate winning a prize at the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, a time saving (time saving after big hit), b time saving (play time), and c time saving (sudden time saving) are executed. In a time saving (time saving after jackpot), the game state is switched to time saving after the jackpot game. In the b time saving (play time), the game state switches to the time saving state when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number of times (for example, 500 times) in the normal state. In c time saving (sudden time saving), the game state is switched to the time saving state when the fixed stop is made with a specific losing pattern in the normal state. Specifically, c time saving (sudden time saving) switches the game state to the time saving state after a specific losing pattern is fixed and stopped when "loss (sudden time saving)" is determined by the random number per special symbol in the normal state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game executed by winning ``0 R time saving 0 times big win'' and ``0R time saving 0 times small win'' is ``time saving state and high base state''. The "time-saving state and high-base state" ends when the variable display (variable display) of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times, or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. The game state after the big win game executed by winning the "0R normal small win" is "non-time-saving state and low base state". This game state is also called "normal game state". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the normal game state. Here, the "time saving state and high base state" is simply referred to as "time saving state", and the "non-working time saving state and low base state" is simply referred to as "non working time saving state".

In the high base state (time saving state), the game can be progressed advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by striking to the right. Compared to the low-base state (non-time-saving state), the electric chew 29 is easier to open, and it is easier to win the first start port 30 and the second start port 21 than the first start port 20. This is because From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is hit to the right to win the first start port 30 or the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Compared to the high base state, the electric chew 29 is less likely to be opened, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than winning the first starting port 30 or the second starting port 21. is. For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . As will be described below, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the program stored in the main ROM 83 to function as win/fail determination means, symbol control means, winning game execution means, game state control means, and winning type selection means. Function.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. As for the initial value of the flag, the ceiling flag is "1", ie, "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", ie, "OFF". The initial value of status is "1". The initial value of the counter is a predetermined value (eg, 500) for the ceiling counter, and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values shown in FIG. Fluctuation pattern random number, normal random number per design, type random number per normal design) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V opening/closing member control process (step S106), V area The sensor detection process (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V area sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pending ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 . Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. FIG. The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S110). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol reserved ball number is "1 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the normal design reserved ball number is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the normal design reserved ball number (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 is the normal per symbol random number counter value (FIG. 8: label-TRND-H value), and the normal per symbol type counter value (FIG. 8: label-TRND-HS value ), and stores the acquired random value group in the first storage area of the general pattern reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84 .

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "1" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208 ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (Figure 8: label-TRND-A value), the value of the type random number counter per special symbol (Figure 8: label-TRND-AS value), the value of the reach random number counter ( Figure 8: Label-TRND-RC value) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Figure 8: Label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process described later ( hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). In the special figure 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large-hit pre-determination with reference to the big-hit determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to be referred to. When the result of the jackpot prior determination is "jackpot", the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type prior determination. In the jackpot type advance determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for prior determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs advance determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs variation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing, and a reach random number value do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot) and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and finishes this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the type random number counter per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, the value of the variation pattern random number counter get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process. Let After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The special figure 1 pre-determination process is the same as the special figure 2 pre-determination process described above.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 29 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 29 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When the electric chew 29 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is stopped (whether the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the normal symbols are not being stopped and displayed (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are fluctuating (step S503). When the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to step S521. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S504). If the number of held balls is "0" (step S504: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of reserved balls in the normal design is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 18). ”, and then, in this step S505, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". It should be noted that the decrement of the number of normal pattern reserved balls (digestion of the normal pattern reserved) is executed together with the clearing process of clearing the reserved information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the normal pattern reserved storage area 86. be.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13A) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the random number per normal symbol as the determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first normal pattern suspension) of the normal pattern suspension storage area 86 read out. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol winning random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T5 are used. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the random number per normal symbol is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and if the random number per normal symbol is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (FIG. 13(A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol type determination table T6 (FIG. 13(B)) and determines the type of normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) (step S507). Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 wins in the hit determination of the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hit stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 Reads a type random value. Then, using the normal symbol type random number value, the game state (whether it is a time saving state, and what is the trigger for the time saving state), and the normal design per type determination table T6, the type and the normal design ( Normal pattern stop pattern) is judged. For example, in the case of a non-time-saving state, regardless of the type random number per normal pattern (any of 0 to 65535), the hit type is determined to be "short open", and the normal design is "hit pattern 1". is determined. During the time saving state that is executed after winning the special drawing 1 lottery in a time saving (after the big hit), and during b time saving (play time), c time saving (sudden time saving) When winning in the general drawing lottery , As shown in "Special figure 1 time saving state" in FIG. The stopped symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 2". When the normal pattern per type random number value is "65301 to 65535", the per type is determined as "long open 2", and the normal per pattern stop pattern is determined as "per pattern 3". Of the time saving (after the big hit), when winning in the normal lottery during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in "Special figure 2 time saving state" in FIG. 13 (B) In addition, regardless of the normal per pattern type random number value (any of 0 to 65535), the per type is determined as "long open 2", and the normal pattern stop design is determined as "per pattern 3". On the other hand, in the case of "losing" in the hit determination, "losing" is set as a normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13(C)) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. do. For example, when the hit type is "short open" in the non-time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". Further, for example, in the time-saving state, if the hit determination is "losing", the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13(C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol variation start and variation time (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information about normal stop symbol data and information about normal symbol variation patterns. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of the normal symbols, and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13(C)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbols in the normal symbols specified in step S507 (the winning normal stop symbols or the losing normal symbols). stop symbol) (step S522). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of normal symbol variation stop (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol, and finishes this process (step S524). Here, the stop time for normal symbols is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation stop time has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the stop display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has passed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs this process if the hit determination in the above (step S506) is "losing" (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the opening of the game (normal game), normal symbol opening A command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 29 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the electric chew 29 using the normal symbol type (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. Choose a pattern. Here, for example, when the normal pattern is "win pattern 1", "open pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal pattern is "win pattern 3", "open pattern 13" is selected (see FIG. 14). . After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 29 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 29 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 29 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 2 pieces), or the time to close the electric chew 29 after the opening time of the electric chew 29 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The open time of electric chew 29 is the open time corresponding to the open pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition for the electric chew 29 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 29 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to inform the start of the ending of the game (normal game), so that the normal symbol ending A command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 29 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage corresponds to a "special operation status" of "1", "2", respectively. , 3, 4, 5. When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, special symbol hit determination, special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), a special electric auditors process 1 (jackpot game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process 1, a jackpot game (second type special game) is executed. When the "special action status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), special electric auditors processing 2 (small winning game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessary product process 2, a small winning game (first type special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved) of the first start ports 20 and 30 is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, the random value acquired due to the winning of the first start ports 20, 30 in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If no group is stored, the process moves to step S1411. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol hit determination processing (step S1402) and special symbol variation pattern selection processing (step S1403). to run. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a to the side where it is read out from the current position ( step S1405). By the above steps, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side, and the oldest reserved image 9A is reserved digested. It is displayed as image 9C. Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process 1 (step S1406). In the game state management process 1, when the time saving flag is ON, it is determined that it is determined to be "losing (suddenly time saving)" by the determination by the special symbol per random number value, and when the third time saving counter becomes 0, c time saving pattern fluctuation At the start of the time saving flag is switched to OFF. Details will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1407). In the special figure 1 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the special design hit determination process (step S1402) and special design variation Information about the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1403) and information set in the game state management process 1 are included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved) for the second starting port 21 is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step S1411). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1411: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1421. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1411: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol hit determination processing (step S1412) and special symbol variation pattern selection processing (step S1413). to run. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1414). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side where it is read out from the current position ( step S1415). By the above steps, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side, and the oldest reserved image 9B is reserved digested It is displayed as image 9C. Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process 1 (step S1416). In the game state management process 1, when the time saving flag is ON, it is determined that it is determined to be "losing (suddenly time saving)" by the determination by the special symbol per random number value, and when the third time saving counter becomes 0, c time saving pattern fluctuation At the start of the time saving flag is switched to OFF. Details will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1417). In the special figure 2 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1417). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the special design hit determination process (step S1412) and special design variation Information on the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1413) and information set in the game state management process 1 are included.

In step S1411, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1411: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1421). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1421: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1421: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of a predetermined standby time, and sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1422), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols based on the second special symbol reservation is executed only when the first special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the first special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the second special figure reservation.

[Special symbol hit determination process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of special symbol hit determination processing (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1412). Hit determination processing of special figure 2 (step S1402) and hit determination processing of special figure 1 (step S1412) because the flow of processing is the same, it explains collectively. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 hit determination process, the special symbol per random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 hit determination process, the special symbol random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit using the special symbol hit determination table T1 to be referred to and the read special symbol hit random number value. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win/fail determination means".

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1505) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a special symbol per type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 hit determination process, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 hit determination process, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as "hit type selection means". After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop design data (jackpot design) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, when the result of special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" (step S1503: NO) but "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag. (Step S1512), small hit type is determined (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol per type random number value as a determination value in the same manner as in the determination of the jackpot type. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After the determination of the small winning type, the special figure stop design data (small winning design) corresponding to the specified small winning type is set in the winning type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and the process is terminated.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" "small hit" but "loss (sudden time saving)" (steps S1503, S1510: NO, S1520: YES), special figure stop design data according to c time saving design is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1522), and this process is terminated. If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit", "small hit", "losing (sudden time saving)" but "losing" (steps S1503, S1510, S1520: NO), special figure stop design data according to the losing design is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1524), and the process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) to select the fluctuation pattern. (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state jackpot, the portion corresponding to the non-time-saving state jackpot in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. part, the part where the variation pattern is "P14" in the special figure 2) is referred to (address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P14" is selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number in Special Figure 2.

In step S1602, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state small hit among the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) to determine the variation pattern. A selection is made (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variation pattern random number value as a determination value, similarly to the above step S1603. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern from the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, using the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state small hit and the variation pattern random number value. Here, of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the part with the variation pattern "P3" in the special figure 1, and the variation pattern "P15" in the special figure 2. Therefore, these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value.

In step S1604, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is the ready-to-win random number (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the non-time-saving state reach in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for existence loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for loss with reach in the non-time-saving state, out of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. ”, “P5” part, the variation pattern is “P14” part in the special figure 2). In the special figure 1, either "P4" or "P5" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number. In the special figure 2, "P14" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random number value.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1606: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the non-time-saving state reach in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for no loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, out of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. ”, “P7” part, the variation pattern is “P15” part in the special figure 2). In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P6" or "P7". In the special figure 2, "P15" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random number value. In the special figure 1, since the variation pattern selected by the number of held balls changes, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in special figure 1, when the number of held balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times are selected than when the number of held balls is "1" to "2". It is designed to be As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 is that in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to is steps S1603, S1605, and S1607. , S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time-saving state of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, A table for time-saving states is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the small hit of the time saving state (the variation pattern is "P9" in the special figure 1, and the variation pattern is "P17" in the special figure 2) ) are referenced. Also, for example, in the case of step S1617, of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the loss with reach in the time saving state (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P10" part, in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P18") is referred to.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 17: step S109). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Game State Management Processing 1]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of game state management processing 1 (FIG. 21: steps S1406 and S1416). Since the game state management process 1 (step S1406) of the special figure 2 and the game state management process 1 (step S1416) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, they will be collectively described. In the game state management process 1, when "loss (sudden time reduction)" is selected a specified number of times (for example, 1) in the time saving state, the game state is switched to the normal state at the start of the specified number of c time saving fluctuations. processing. As a result, when the specified number of times "failure (sudden time saving)" is selected in a time saving, a time saving ends when c time saving pattern variation starts, and c time saving starts when c time saving variation ends. In the game state management process 1, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1905). When the time saving flag is OFF (step S1905: NO), the process skips to step S1940. On the other hand, when the time saving flag is ON (step S1905: YES), the third time saving counter C3 is decremented by 1 (step S1915). The "third time saving counter C3" counts the number of c time saving pattern variations executed during the time saving state. The initial value set to the 3rd time saving counter C3 is determined based on the setting table of FIG. After that, it is determined whether or not the third time saving counter C3 has reached 0 (step S1930). When the 3rd time saving counter C3 becomes 0 (step S1930: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S1935). Thereby, the game state is switched from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. That is, when the number of times of c time-saving symbol fluctuation executed in the time-saving state reaches the number of times shown in FIG. 29, the game state is switched to the non-time-saving state. After that, a game state designation command reflecting the above process is set (step S1940).

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the process during special symbol fluctuation (FIG. 20: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1407 or S1417 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S1701: YES), the variable stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). . In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing (stop display of special symbols) to stop the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 with symbols corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "symbol control means". In addition, the stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2 or the like. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 20: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the stop time has passed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process 2 (step S1801). The game state management process 2 is a process for switching the game state between a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process 2, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. Here, regardless of which jackpot type (regardless of whether the special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, or 31H to 33H), the opening pattern of the winning opening is "opening pattern 21 ” is set. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the jackpot won, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big prize winning opening. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "15" is set to the round counter regardless of the type of jackpot (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The contents of the game state reset process will be described later. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, the opening command of the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this processing ends. By setting the special action status to "4", the process shifts to special electric accessary product process 1 (jackpot game).

In step S1802, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the won small prize (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 in the same manner as the above-described step S1803, determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines set the open pattern. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning small prize, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big prize winning opening. (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening/closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period in which the V opening/closing member 71 is to be operated. In the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 35), when the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening/closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small winning game in any small winning game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. When the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, even if the time saving flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF. After that, in order to start the small winning game, the opening command of the small winning is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small winning game is started (step S1814). After that, the special action status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this processing ends. By setting the special action status to "5", the process shifts to the special electric accessary product process 2 (small winning game).

In step S1810, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1820) and terminates this process. As a result, neither the big winning game nor the small winning game is started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is started again, and the special symbol winning determination for the next hold is executed.

[Game state management process 2]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process 2 (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2015. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2010). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2015: NO), that is, when it is in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2060. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2015: YES), that is, when the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation is the variation of the second special symbol (step S2020). When the variation is the variation of the second special symbol (step S2020: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2030). The "first time-saving counter C1" counts the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state. "Second time saving counter C2" counts the number of variations of special symbols executed during the time saving state (the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol). The initial values set in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined based on the setting table of FIG. Drawing 29 is a figure for explaining the setting table of the 1st time saving counter C1, the 2nd time saving counter C2, and the 3rd time saving counter C3. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 at the time of a reduced working hours, b starting of reduced working hours, and c starting of reduced working hours. In FIG. 29, at the start of a time saving, the values set to the time saving counters C1, C2, and C3 differ depending on the jackpot type. b At the start of time saving, "150", "200", and "10" are set to time saving counters C1, C2, and C3. c At the time of starting the time saving, "999", "999" and "100" are set to the time saving counters C1, C2 and C3.

Returning to FIG. 28, when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol (step S2020: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 by 1 (step S2025). .

As a result of step S2025 or step S2030, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 has become "0" (step S2035). When neither value of the 1st time saving counter C1 and the 2nd time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2035: NO), a process skips to step S2045. When the value of at least one of the 1st time saving counter C1 and the 2nd time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2035: YES), a time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2040). Thereby, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. That is, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the time saving state reaches the number of times shown in FIG. 29, the game state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2045, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is "0". If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2045: YES), the ceiling flag is turned off (step S2055). Thereby, b time saving is not started when the ceiling counter becomes "0" in the fluctuation started in the time saving state.

In step S2050, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information (whether or not the time saving state, each value of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

In step S2015, when the time saving flag is OFF (step S2015: NO), it is determined whether or not the change is c time saving design change (step S2060). In the case of c time reduction pattern fluctuation (step S2060: YES), the time reduction flag is turned ON (step S2065), and the setting values shown in the setting table of FIG. are respectively set (step S2070). Thereby, c time saving (sudden time saving) is set. After that, the process moves to step S2045. If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2045: YES), the ceiling flag is turned off (step S2055). Thereby, when the ceiling counter becomes "0" when c time saving is started, b time saving is not started.

In step S2060, if it is not c time saving pattern variation (step S2060: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2075). If the value of the ceiling flag is not "0" (step S2075: NO), the process skips to step S2050. If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2075: YES), turn on the time saving flag (step S2080), set the first time saving counter C1, second time saving counter C2 and third time saving counter C3 to the setting table of FIG. are set (step S2085). Thereby, b time reduction (play time) is set. After that, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2055).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this processing ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the jackpot game currently being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first big winning hole 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the first big winning hole 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30 (step S2203). . The time (timing) to open the first big prize-winning port 30 includes, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when it is temporarily closed after opening. It includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first big prize winning port 30 is reopened has passed and the timing of opening again has arrived. If it is not time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30 (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is the time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning hole opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first big winning hole 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) corresponding to the winning type (big winning type or small winning type). When the one-type jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When the 2-type big winning game is being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the type of the small winning. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round specifying command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the special game (small winning game and big winning game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. do. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub-control board 90 . It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first big winning hole 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the first big winning hole 30 is one. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening in one round, and the round specifying command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the first big winning hole 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the first big winning hole 30 is satisfied. (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings into the first big winning hole 30 in the round game has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, nine per round), or that the first big winning hole 30 is closed. It means that either of the conditions of closing time (that is, elapse of a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) after the opening of the first big prize winning opening 30) is satisfied. Then, when the condition for closing the first big winning hole 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the first big winning hole 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the first big winning hole 30 (step S2211), Finish processing.

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has passed since the first big prize winning opening 30 was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first big winning hole 30 between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the first big winning opening 30 was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter has become "0". is determined (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2227). , start the jackpot ending (step S2228). The ending command contains information about the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, and ends this process. The game state setting process (FIG. 32) sets the game state (time saving state or non-time saving state) after the jackpot game, and in the case of the time saving state, according to the type of hit, the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving This is the process of setting the initial value (number of times of time saving) to the counter C2.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 31: step S2234). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game executed this time is a jackpot game triggered by the time saving hit (step S2301). If the time saving hit is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current jackpot game is being executed with the normal hit as the trigger, the process skips to step S2310. On the other hand, if the jackpot game of this time is executed triggered by the time saving hit (step S2301: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), the first time saving counter C1, the second time saving counter C2 and the third time saving counter The setting values shown in the setting table of FIG. 29 are set in C3 (step S2303). Thereby, a time saving (after the jackpot time saving) is set. In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and sets the prescribed number of rotations (for example, 500 times) to reach b time reduction (play time) in the ceiling counter (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the set number of times (for example, 500 times) is reached, b time saving (play time) is entered. In step S2312, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information about the set game state (whether or not the time saving state, the respective values of the time saving counters C1, C2, C3, etc.).

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
33 and 34 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory process 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The “finishing flag for the small winning” is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the small winning game being executed. If the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. When the small hit end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

When the large winning opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the large winning opening 35 (step S2404). The time (timing) for opening the big winning opening 35 is when the time for opening the small winning opening has passed and the timing for opening the opening has arrived. The opening time of the small win is 4 seconds for the opening pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds for the opening pattern 23. If it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. When it is time (timing) to open the big winning hole 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning hole opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) corresponding to the small winning type. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. FIG. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub-control board 90 . After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2402, when the large winning opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening 35 are satisfied (step S2410). ). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes into the big winning hole 35 reaches a specified maximum winning number (for example, 10), or that the time to close the big winning hole 35 (that is, elapse of a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after opening the winning opening 35). If the condition for closing the big winning opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the large winning opening 35 are satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs large winning opening closing processing to close (block) the large winning opening 35 (step S2412). ). Here, in addition, the ending command of the small winning game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a small winning ending process for ending the small winning game. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small winning game corresponds to the 1R eye. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and ends this process.

In the above step S2400, if the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval time (ending time) after closing has passed (step S2420 ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has passed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2430). "V flag" is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the V area 39 during execution of a small winning game, and is a flag that is turned ON in a V area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) to be described later. . When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter to "0" (step S3432) and sets the special action status to "1" because the second jackpot game is not executed. ” (step S2434), and the process ends. As a result, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process.

In the above-described step S2430, when the V flag is ON (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and sets the jackpot flag to execute the two-type jackpot game. is turned ON (step S2437), and the special action status is set to "4" (step S2438). By setting the special action status to "4", in the next special action process (FIG. 20), the process shifts to special electric auditors process 1 (jackpot game). After setting the special action status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), it switches to OFF (step S2442). Thereby, it becomes a non-time-saving state during the execution of the two-type jackpot game. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening command of the second jackpot game (step S2444), and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). As a result, the small winning game in which the big winning opening 35 is opened for a short period of time is shifted to the two-kind big winning game.

[V opening/closing member control processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). If the V opening/closing member actuation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process ends. If the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), "V opening/closing member operation processing" is performed to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern (step S2502). A "V effective period setting process" for validating the V passage of the game ball is performed (step S2504). When the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small winning game is started (FIG. 27: steps S1812 and S1814), so that the V opening/closing member operation processing and the V effective period setting processing are performed in accordance with the small winning game. will be done.

In the V opening/closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operation time of the V opening/closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the timing for opening the V opening/closing member 71 comes. , the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned off when the timing for closing the V opening/closing member 71 comes. As a result, the V opening/closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small winning game. Specifically, the V opening and closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, and then controlled to a passage permitted state (open state) for 4 seconds. After that, the passage blocking state (closed state) is controlled for 6 seconds.

In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period is set for the constant operation of the V opening/closing member 71 as described above. The "V effective period" is a period during which the V flag is turned ON when the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball, regarding the detection as valid. The V effective period is from the start of opening of the V area 39 (at the time when control of the V opening/closing member 71 to the passage permitting state is started) until a predetermined time elapses. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the V area 39 (the time during which the V opening/closing member 71 is controlled to the passage permitting state) (here, the opening time of the V area 39 + 1 second). This is because the game ball passing through the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 reaches the V area 39 in consideration of the time lag. In the V valid period setting process, a timer for measuring the V valid period is set, and based on the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when the timing for validating the V area 39 comes, and the V area 39 is activated. The V valid flag is turned OFF when the invalidation timing comes. In the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress depending on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening/closing member operation processing and the V effective period setting processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V opening/closing member operation processing (step S2502), the total operation time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the V opening/closing member 71 is calculated. ) has passed. If the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has not ended (step S2506: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this processing.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the big winning opening 35 (opening/closing member 32) in the small winning game will be described. As described above, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "3R normal small win (substantially impossible to pass V)" (open pattern 23), the big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the small win game opening, and then closed for 29.5 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed 0.01 seconds after the large winning opening 35 is opened, and the V passage of the game ball during the small winning game is substantially impossible. there is On the other hand, in the “3R time-saving one-time small win”, “3R normal small win”, (open pattern 24), the big winning opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, and then 29 Released for .5 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 24, the big winning opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and both openings continue for about 4 seconds. Therefore, the game ball can pass through the V region 39 even if the game ball enters the big winning hole 35 at any winning timing. It should be noted that here, if the game ball is hit rightward and the game ball is continuously shot, the big winning device 36 or the like is installed so that the game ball always wins the big winning hole 35 during the opening period of the big winning hole 35. Each device is placed. Further, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the big winning opening 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in the "3R time-saving one-time small hit" and "3R normal small hit", if the game ball is continuously shot by hitting to the right during the small hit game, the game ball will always pass through V. It's like

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 35). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or after it is closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603) and sets the V passage command to the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 ( Step S2604), this processing ends. "V pass command" is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of V pass.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 . As will be described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as effect executing means by reading programs stored in the sub ROM 93 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8(B) and updates them. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number value may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 37: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 39) will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 39), etc. It is transmitted to the lamp control board 107 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 38: step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. In the look-ahead effect determination process, a look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, and a look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, if the pre-determination command has not been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change effect start processing (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4465: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). "Opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sub-submits the information on the special stop pattern data included in the opening command and set at the time of the winning judgment for the big win or the small win. Set in RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (step 4315 in FIG. 38), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round production pattern determination processing" is a process of selecting an open game production pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (jackpot game or small winning game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small winning game from the main control board 80, it performs a process different from the above-described ending effect pattern determination process. In addition, in step S4495, when the ending command of a jackpot game is not received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it is received (step S4505: YES), a normal symbol variation effect start process is performed (step S4510). "Normal design fluctuation production start processing" is a process of selecting a normal design fluctuation production pattern (contents) to be executed during normal design fluctuation. In the normal symbol variation performance start process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first sets information on the normal symbol stop symbol data and information on the normal symbol variation pattern included in the normal symbol variation start command in the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating the pattern as the determination result of the hit determination process of the normal pattern, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 . The performance control microcomputer 91 selects a normal symbol variation performance pattern preset corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern, and stores a normal symbol variation performance start command for starting the selected normal symbol variation performance in the sub RAM 94. It is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the normal symbol variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined normal symbol variation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4505, if the normal symbol variation start command is not received (step S4505: NO), the above normal symbol variation effect start processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it is received (step S4515: YES), the normal symbol variation effect end processing is performed (step S4520). "Normal design fluctuation production end processing" is a process for stopping the normal design fluctuation production. In the normal design variation performance end processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal design variation stop command and sets the normal design variation performance end command for ending the normal design variation performance in the performance command set area 94b. . It should be noted that, in step S4515, when the normal symbol variation stop command is not received (step S4515: NO), the above-described normal symbol variation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If it is received (step S4525: YES), normal symbol opening effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4530). "Normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the time of a winning game (normal game) associated with normal symbol winning. The normal game effects selected here include an opening effect executed during the opening and an opening game effect executed while the electric chew 29 is open. In the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command and relates to the normal symbol stop symbol data set at the time of the winning determination of the normal symbol included in the normal symbol opening command. The information is set in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal pattern stop symbol data is selected, and the normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is transmitted as the effect command of the sub RAM 94. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined opening effect image. is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In step S4525, when the normal symbol opening command is not received (step S4525: NO), the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If it is received (step S4535: YES), normal symbol ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4540). "Normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a winning game (normal game) associated with normal symbol winning. In the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command, and sets information on the normal symbol stop symbol data contained in the normal symbol ending command in the sub-RAM 94 . Then, the effect pattern of the ending effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal pattern stop pattern data is selected, and the normal pattern ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is transmitted as the effect command of the sub RAM 94. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined ending effect image. is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In step S4535, when the normal symbol ending command is not received (step S4535: NO), the above-described normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a time reduction state, time reduction counters C1, C2, C3 each value) is stored in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, advance determination command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 39: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a variation production pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires a variable effect pattern random number value for effect determination. Then, from among the variable performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is set. The effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the details of the advance notice effect such as the so-called step-up notice effect, the chance-up notice effect, etc., based on the variable effect pattern random number value, and further refers to the stop symbol pattern determination table T52, and stops. A combination of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R to be displayed is determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect. In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the c time saving design variation from the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command, the stop design corresponding to the c time saving variation is selected. Here, when c time saving is selected, there is a case where the decorative pattern is stopped at "595".

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020 ), the process ends. When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (step 4315 in FIG. 38), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 generates a predetermined variable effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

8. Operation of Movable Board The operation of the movable board (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15, etc.) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49. FIG. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the movable accessories such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during the game presentation (display presentation), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on, or displays the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory. 15 or the like to emit light in a specific mode.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction (moving in the advancing direction). FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) are attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have a half arc shape of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is at a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can stand still (first aspect). At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are partially visible. As for the first movable accessory 14, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the center of the display screen 7a (to approach each other) as shown in FIG. By moving, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 42 to form one decorative member (united accessory) (second mode). Here, the united character forms the outline of the face. In this second mode, the combined accessory obtained by combining the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion covers a part of the display screen 7a near the center on the front surface of the image display device 7, and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stops in a visible state. In other words, the united role is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed and the central part of the face is absent, and instead the display screen 7a can be visually recognized. The first movable accessory 14 can be moved (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 42 through the state shown in FIG. 41 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stand still. .

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 43 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIG. 43 to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still there.

44A and 44B are explanatory diagrams illustrating display effects of the illumination panel 18. FIG. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53 , and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18 . That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 , and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18 . The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating LED light from the end surface. Here, an image of a smiley face is displayed as an example. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the direction and color of light emitted from the LEDs. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be placed on the front side of the image display device 7 and not necessarily on the front side of the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15 . That is, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the rear side (back side) of the decorative member 10 and the third movable accessory 17, which will be described later, in addition to the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. may be

45A and 45B are explanatory diagrams illustrating the lighting effect of the frame lamp 66. FIG. A plurality of LERs are arranged side by side on the surface of the frame lamp 66, and each of them is configured to be switched on/off. As a result, the frame lamp 66 can emit light at any position in any color. The frame lamp 66 may be configured as a liquid crystal panel.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the decorative member 10. FIG. The gaming machine 1 may have configurations other than those described above. For example, the gaming machine may have the decorative member 10 . Here, the decorative member 10 is fixed to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and has a sub-liquid crystal device 13 in the center. The decorative member 10 has a circular shape, and the sub-liquid crystal device 13 also has a circular shape. Any image can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal device 13 .

The operation and the like of the third movable accessory 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47A and 47B are explanatory diagrams illustrating movement modes of the third movable accessory 17. FIG. 48A and 48B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying the movement mode and the display mode of the third movable accessory 17. FIG. The gaming machine 1 may have configurations other than those described above. For example, the game machine may have the third movable accessory 17 . The third movable accessory 17 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 . It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the third movable accessory 17 can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the third movable accessory 17 has a liquid crystal panel arranged on its surface, and can display any image. In addition, the third movable accessory 17 may have a decorative portion formed at least partially, or may have transparency.

49A and 49B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying combinations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, the third movable accessory 17, and the decorative member 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, the third movable accessory 17, and the decorative member 10 can be in a state in which they partially overlap each other. In addition, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 17 may be composed of liquid crystal panels, and may be configured to be able to display any image, or at least a portion of which may be transparent. The image displayed on the display screen 7a through the movable accessories 14, 15, and 17 may be visible.

9. Other Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modified Examples, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect examples, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

50 to 52, the display content change effects A to C when the condition is met will be described below. The effect of changing the display contents when the condition is met can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the display content change effect when the condition is satisfied is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. to display an image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the display content change effect when the condition is satisfied is included, the first movable accessory 14 or the second A movable accessory such as the movable accessory 15 is driven.

[Display content change effect A when conditions are met]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the display content change effect A when the condition is satisfied. The display content change effect when the condition is established is a production in which the effect content changes at the time of a certain special figure fluctuation during the specific period depending on whether or not the preset condition is satisfied during the specific period when the special figure fluctuation is executed. be. In this case, a "time-saving state period" is set as the "fixed time period". In addition, it is set that "special figure 2 variation is executed" as "preset conditions". As "a certain special figure fluctuation time during a specific period", "special figure fluctuation time when the number of times of time saving remaining is 10" and "last special figure fluctuation time during time saving state" are set.

In the display content change effect A when the condition is established, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10) described as being The player hits to the right, the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28, and the game ball entering the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Ball (See FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 1 Time Saving State”). Either the first starting hole 30 or the second starting hole 21 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 75 and the second winning hole 76, and the game ball enters the opened starting holes 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) or the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs. Depending on the opening pattern of the electric tube 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (Fig. 13 (B ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 50(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The display screen 7a displays a pending icon 9A representing the special figure 1 pending, a pending icon 9B representing the special figure 2 pending, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "time saving remaining 21 times", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed.

FIG. 50(B) shows a state where the next special figure 1 variation of the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 50(A) is finished. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. 50(A) and (B), the special figure 1 reservation is not acquired, and the special figure 1 reservation becomes 0, so the special figure 2 reservation is digested. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A disappears, and the pending icon 9B shifts to become a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. After that, special figure 2 variation is executed.

When the special figure 2 variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the display screen 7a displays the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2 variation). display is displayed. In addition, the display screen 7a displays "19 times of time saving remaining" as the number of times of remaining time saving, and "special figure 2 fluctuation" as the special figure display during fluctuation. That is, here, the special figure 1 reservation to be preferentially digested becomes 0, and the special figure 2 reservation exists, so that the condition that the special figure 2 reservation is digested during the time saving state is satisfied Become.

In this state, the first starting hole 30 is opened by entering the first winning hole 75, and the holding icon 9A is newly displayed by entering the first starting hole 30 as shown in FIG. 50(D). Is displayed. After that, in FIG. 50(E), the special figure 2 variation is finished and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. Since there is one special figure 1 reservation, the special figure 1 reservation is digested. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A shifts and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. After that, special figure 1 variation is executed.

When the special figure 1 variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the display screen 7a shows the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1 variation). display is displayed. In the display screen 7a, in addition, "18 times of time saving remaining" is displayed as the number of times of remaining time saving, and "special figure 1 fluctuation" is displayed as special figure display during fluctuation.

After that, when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, as shown in FIG. That is, "the remaining number of times of time saving is 10". At this time, a character image CG appears as shown in FIG. 50(H). This character image CG is displayed at "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of times of time saving is 10" when the condition "special figure 2 fluctuation is executed at the time of time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 variation is executed at the time of 20 remaining time saving. If the condition is not satisfied at the time of the remaining 10 times of time saving, the character image CG is not displayed at the time of "change of the remaining 10 times of time saving". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 variation is executed during a short period of time, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the content of the effect changes. Here, the character image CG is a smiley face image, and is displayed overlapping the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1 variation). After that, as shown in FIG. 50(I), the display of the character image CG disappears, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are still displayed.

After that, further, when the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is repeated, as shown in FIG. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". At this time, as shown in FIG. 50(K), a result image representing the special figure 2 variation frequency performed during the time saving state, represented as "special figure 2 variation number 1 time" appears. This result image is displayed in "the last special figure variation in the time saving state" when the condition "special figure 2 variation is executed in the time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 variation is executed once at the time of 20 times remaining time saving. If the conditions are not satisfied at the time of the remaining 0 times of time saving, the result image is not displayed at the time of "the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 variation is executed during a short period of time, the result image may appear or may not appear, and the production contents change. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a character image drawn inside the frame image, and the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1 variation) It is displayed overlaid on the display. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(L), even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the result image is maintained.

[Display content change effect B when conditions are met]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the display content change effect B when the condition is satisfied. The display content change effect when the condition is established is a production in which the effect content changes at the time of a certain special figure fluctuation during the specific period depending on whether or not the preset condition is satisfied during the specific period when the special figure fluctuation is executed. be. Here, the "time-saving state period" is set as the "fixed time period". In addition, it is set that "special figure 2 reservation occurs" as "preset condition". As "a certain special figure fluctuation time during a specific period", "special figure fluctuation time when the number of times of time saving remaining is 10" and "last special figure fluctuation time during time saving state" are set. FIGS. 51A to 51F show the flow of effects when the conditions are met, and FIGS. 51G to 51L show the flow of effects when the conditions are not met.

In the display content change effect B when the condition is established, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10) described as being The player hits to the right, the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28, and the game ball entering the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Ball (See FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 1 Time Saving State”). Either the first starting hole 30 or the second starting hole 21 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 75 and the second winning hole 76, and the game ball enters the opened starting holes 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) or the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs. Depending on the opening pattern of the electric tube 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (Fig. 13 (B ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

FIGS. 51A to 51F show the flow of effects when the conditions are met. As shown in FIG. 51(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed. Reservation icon 9B representing special figure 2 reservation is not displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "remaining 21 times of time saving", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed.

FIG. 51(B) shows the state when the number of times of remaining time saving is displayed as "18 times of remaining time saving". Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, opens the second starting hole 21, and enters the second starting hole 21, A pending icon 9B is newly displayed.

After that, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is repeated, and in FIG. 51(C), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "15 remaining time saving" is shown. Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, opens the second starting hole 21, and enters the second starting hole 21, A state in which the second pending icon 9B is displayed is shown.

After that, further, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and in FIG. 51(D), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 10 times" is shown. That is, it becomes "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the number of remaining time reduction is 10". Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. At this time, a character image CG appears. This character image CG is displayed at "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of times of time saving is 10" when the condition "special figure 2 suspension occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIG. 51 (B) (C), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 hold has occurred at the time of 18 remaining time and 15 times of time saving. In the game machine 1, the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, so the special figure 2 reservation is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the appearance of the character image CG can give the player a sense of accomplishment. If the condition is not satisfied at the time of the remaining 10 times of time saving, the character image CG is not displayed at the time of "change of the remaining 10 times of time saving". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 suspension has occurred during a short period of time, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the content of the presentation changes. Here, the character image CG is a face image of Smile, and the same number of character images CG as the number of generated special figure 2 reservations appear. After that, the display of the character image CG disappears, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed.

After that, further, when the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is repeated, as shown in FIG. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". At this time, as shown in FIG. 51(F), a result image representing the number of special figures 2 pending that occurred during the time saving state, represented as "two special figures 2 pending acquisition", appears. This result image is displayed at the time of "the last special figure variation during the time saving state" when the condition "special figure 2 suspension occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIG. 51 (B) (C), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 hold has occurred at the time of 18 remaining time and 15 times of time saving. If the conditions are not satisfied at the time of the remaining 0 times of time saving, the result image is not displayed at the time of "the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 suspension has occurred during a short period of time, the result image may or may not appear, and the content of the effect changes. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a character image drawn inside the frame image, and the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1 variation) It is displayed overlaid on the display. After that, even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the result image is maintained.

FIGS. 51(G)-(L) show the flow of effects when the conditions are not met. FIG. 51(G) is the same state as FIG. 51(A). FIG. 51(H) shows the state when the number of times of remaining time saving is displayed as "18 times of remaining time saving". Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51(B), the ball is not entered into the second starting hole 21 and the pending icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is repeated, and in FIG. 51 (I), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "15 remaining time saving" is shown. Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51(C), the ball is not entered into the second starting hole 21 and the pending icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, further, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and in FIG. 51 (J), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "10 remaining time saving" is shown. That is, it becomes "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the number of remaining time reduction is 10". Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51(D), the character image CG does not appear. The character image CG is displayed at "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of times of time saving is 10" when the condition "special figure 2 suspension occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. In Figure 51 (G) ~ (L), after the occurrence of time saving, no special figure 2 hold has occurred. In the game machine 1, the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, so the special figure 2 reservation is unlikely to occur. Therefore, there are cases where the character image CG does not appear. In this way, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 reservation has occurred during a short period of time, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the content of the presentation changes.

After that, further, when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, as shown in FIG. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". Unlike FIG. 51 (F), the result image representing the number of special figures 2 pending that occurred during the time saving state represented as "special figure 2 pending acquisition number 0" does not appear. This result image is displayed at the time of "the last special figure variation during the time saving state" when the condition "special figure 2 suspension occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. In FIG. 51 (G) ~ (L), after the occurrence of time saving, the special figure 2 hold has not occurred even once, the conditions for displaying the result image are not satisfied. In this way, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 reservation has occurred during a short period of time, the result image may or may not appear, and the content of the effect changes.

[Display content change effect C when conditions are met]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the display content change effect C when the condition is satisfied. The display content change effect when the condition is established is a production in which the effect content changes at the time of a certain special figure fluctuation during the specific period depending on whether or not the preset condition is satisfied during the specific period when the special figure fluctuation is executed. be. In this case, a "time-saving state period" is set as the "fixed time period". In addition, it is set that "special figure 2 reservation occurs" as "preset condition". As "a certain special figure fluctuation time during a specific period", "special figure fluctuation time when the number of times of time saving remaining is 10" and "last special figure fluctuation time during time saving state" are set. FIGS. 52A to 52F show the flow of effects when the conditions are met, and FIGS. 52G to 52L show the flow of effects when the conditions are not met.

In the display content change effect C when the condition is established, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10) described as being The player hits to the right, the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28, and the game ball entering the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Ball (See FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 1 Time Saving State”). Either the first starting hole 30 or the second starting hole 21 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 75 and the second winning hole 76, and the game ball enters the opened starting holes 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) or the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs. Depending on the opening pattern of the electric tube 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (Fig. 13 (B ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

FIGS. 52A to 52F show the flow of effects when the conditions are met. As shown in FIG. 52(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The display screen 7a displays a pending icon 9A representing the special figure 1 pending, a pending icon 9B representing the special figure 2 pending, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "time saving remaining 21 times", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed.

Toku-zu variation (Toku-zu 1 variation or Toku-zu 2 variation) is repeated, and in FIG. 52(B), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 10 times" is shown. That is, it becomes "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the number of remaining time reduction is 10". Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. At this time, a result image representing the number of special figures 2 pending that occurred during the time saving state, represented as "1 special figure 2 pending acquisition number", appears. Specifically, a result image representing the number of special figure 2 pending that occurred from after the time saving start to the present time in the time saving state appears. This result image is always displayed at the time of "special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of time saving is 10", and when the condition "special figure 2 hold occurs in time saving state" is met, "special figure 2 hold acquisition The display contents of the "〇 pieces" part of "Number of 〇 pieces" will change. Here, since one special figure 2 reservation has occurred, the "○" part is displayed as "1". Here, even if the special figure 2 suspension is 0 when the special figure 2 suspension is digested after the occurrence, and the special figure 2 suspension is 0 at the time of the special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of time reduction is 10, the "special figure 2 suspension acquisition number ” becomes “1 piece”. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 suspension is digested after the occurrence, and the special figure 2 suspension is 0 at the time of "special figure fluctuation when the number of times of time reduction remaining is 10", the "special figure 2 suspension acquisition number" is "0" ” may be displayed. In the game machine 1, the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, so the special figure 2 reservation is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment by displaying the number of acquisitions of special figure 2 pending in this result image. When the conditions are not satisfied at the time of the ten remaining times of time saving, a result image with different contents is displayed as shown in FIG. 52(H). That is, the display content of the result image changes depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold has occurred during a short period of time. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a character image drawn inside the frame image, and the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1 variation) It is displayed overlaid on the display. After the result image is displayed, the display disappears after a predetermined time has passed, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed.

After that, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is repeated, and in FIG. 52(C), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 5 times" is shown. Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, opens the second starting hole 21, and enters the second starting hole 21, A state in which the second pending icon 9B is displayed is shown.

After that, further, when the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is repeated, as shown in FIG. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". At this time, the result image of the second time during the time saving appears, which is expressed as "Toku-zu 2 pending acquisition number 2". Specifically, the second result image representing the number of special figure 2 pending that has occurred from after the time saving start to the current time in the time saving state appears. This second result image is always displayed at the time of "the last special figure change in the time saving state", and when the condition "special figure 2 hold occurs in the time saving state" is met, "special figure 2 hold acquisition The display contents of the "〇 pieces" part of "Number of 〇 pieces" will change. Here, since two special figure 2 reservations have occurred, the "0" part is displayed as "2". Here, even if the special figure 2 suspension is digested after the occurrence of the special figure 2 suspension, and the special figure 2 suspension is 0 at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, the "special figure 2 suspension acquisition number" is "2 becomes “individual”. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold is digested after the occurrence and the special figure 2 hold is 0 at the time of the last special figure change in the time saving state, the "special figure 2 hold acquisition number" is displayed as "0" You may do so. When the conditions are not met at the time of the last special figure variation in the time saving state, a result image with different contents is displayed as shown in FIG. 52(J). That is, the display content of the result image changes depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold has occurred during a short period of time. When the special figure 1 fluctuation of Figure 52 (D) stops, the game state switches from the time saving state to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(E), while the display of the result image is maintained, the special figure 1 variation is repeatedly executed until the special figure 1 suspension disappears. Here, since there are three special figure 1 reservations at the time of FIG. 52(D), the special figure 1 lottery is executed three times. At this time, the time saving remaining number display is maintained as "time saving remaining 0 times", and the special figure display during fluctuation is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation".

When the special figure 1 reservation is all gone, as shown in FIG. 52(F), the special figure 2 reservation is digested and the special figure 2 variation is executed. At this time, a character image of "Special figure 2 fluctuation start!" is displayed. The special figure display during fluctuation is represented as "special figure 2 fluctuation".

FIGS. 52(G)-(L) show the flow of effects when the conditions are not met. In FIG. 52 (G), the display of the number of times represented as "time saving remaining 21 times" is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 52 (A). Variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to special figure 1 variation is displayed. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 52(A), the pending icon 9B representing the special figure 2 pending is not displayed. That is, special figure 2 reservation has not yet been acquired in the time saving state.

FIG. 52(H) shows the state when the number of times of remaining time saving is displayed as "10 times of remaining time saving". Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51(B), the ball is not entered into the second starting hole 21 and the pending icon 9B is not displayed. At this time, a result image appears indicating that special figure 2 suspension has not occurred during the time saving state, which is expressed as "special figure 2 suspension has not yet been acquired". Specifically, a result image representing the number of special figure 2 pending that occurred from after the time saving start to the present time in the time saving state appears. Here, it is shown that the number of special figures 2 pending that occurred up to the present time in the time saving state was 0. This result image is always displayed at the time of "special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of time saving is 10", and when the condition "special figure 2 suspension occurs when time saving state" is not met, "special figure 2 suspension Not acquired yet" is displayed, and a different content is displayed than when the conditions are met.

After that, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is repeated, and in FIG. 52 (I), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "5 times remaining time saving" is shown. Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display (special figure 1 variation) of the first special symbol is displayed. Unlike FIG. 52(C), the ball is not entered into the second starting hole 21 and the pending icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, further, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and in FIG. 52 (J), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 0 times" is shown. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". At this time, a result image appears indicating that special figure 2 suspension has not occurred during the time saving state, which is expressed as "no special figure 2 suspension acquisition". Specifically, the second result image representing the number of special figure 2 pending that has occurred from after the time saving start to the current time in the time saving state appears. Here, it is shown that the number of special figures 2 pending that occurred up to the present time in the time saving state was 0. This second result image is always displayed at the time of "the last special figure change in the time saving state", and when the condition "special figure 2 suspension occurs in the time saving state" is not met, "special figure 2 suspension Not acquired" is displayed, and a different content is displayed than when the conditions are met. Here, the special figure 2 suspension is digested after the occurrence, and if the special figure 2 suspension is 0 at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, it becomes "special figure 2 suspension acquisition number 0". When the special figure 1 fluctuation of Figure 52 (J) stops, the game state switches from the time saving state to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and when the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested, the shift movement of the pending icon 9A causes the next special figure 1 Fluctuations begin. At this time, as shown in FIG. 52(L), a character image of "NORMAL STATE START!!" is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect of changing the display content when the condition is met is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, during the time saving when the special figure variation is executed, depending on whether or not the condition "special figure 2 variation is performed" is satisfied, "time saving remaining number of times The content of the effect displayed on the display screen 7a changes between "at the time of special figure fluctuation when is 10" and "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". Also, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, during the time saving when the special figure fluctuation is executed, depending on whether the condition "special figure 2 suspension occurs" is satisfied, "time saving remaining number of times is 10 The content of the production displayed on the display screen 7a changes at "at the time of special figure fluctuation" and "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state". According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during a specific period (during a short period of time), a plurality of special figure fluctuations are executed, and a certain special figure fluctuation time is the last during a specific period (during a short period of time) It is time to change the special figure. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific period is a period during the time saving state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the preset condition is the occurrence of a special figure 2 hold due to winning. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special figure 2 reservation is the special figure reservation which is not preferentially digested, out of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a preset condition is satisfied, for example, a first effect in which a character image CG or a result image is displayed is executed, and when the preset condition is not satisfied, A second effect is executed in which the character image CG and the result image are not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the effect of changing the display contents when the condition is satisfied will be shown.
[Modification 1]
When the conditions are met, the display contents change production A to C, when the conditions are met, ``During the special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of time reduction is 10'' and ``The last special figure fluctuation during the time saving state'' twice, production The content is subject to change. However, the production contents may change only when either "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the number of times of time saving remaining is 10" or "at the time of last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state".

[Modification 2]
In the display content change effects A to C when the conditions are met, the character image CG is displayed when the conditions are met, and when the conditions are not met, the character image CG is displayed. is assumed not to be displayed. However, the manner in which the effect content is changed depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied is not limited to this. For example, different character images, different background images, different story images, or the like may be displayed, different music may be played, or different character action may be performed depending on whether or not the conditions are satisfied. Moreover, when the conditions are satisfied, the above effect may be executed "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state".

[Modification 3]
In the display content change effects A to C when the conditions are met, the character image CG is displayed "at the time of special figure fluctuation when the remaining number of time reduction is 10" when the conditions are satisfied. However, when the condition is satisfied, the character image CG may be displayed "at the time of the last special figure fluctuation during the time saving state". Also, the character image CG and the resulting image may be displayed together.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
an effect display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects;
A gaming machine comprising a special figure display means capable of displaying special figure fluctuations,
Depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied during the specific period during which the special figure variation is executed, the content of the presentation displayed on the presentation display means during a certain special figure variation during the specific period changes. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
During the specific period, the special figure variation is executed multiple times,
The certain special figure fluctuation time is the last special figure fluctuation time during the specific period,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
The specific period is a period during the time saving state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
The preset condition is the occurrence of a special figure reservation due to winning,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
The special figure reservation is the special figure reservation that is not prioritized among the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
When the preset condition is satisfied, the first effect is executed,
If the preset condition is not satisfied, a second effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. This icon display effect can be executed, for example, during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pending ball number command, the game state designation command, the variable effect start command, etc. received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the icon display effect is included, the ROM 103 corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7 to display the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon display effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect A. FIG. The icon display performance is a performance in which an icon is displayed when the ball is entered into the starting hole during the first period, and the icon is not displayed in the subsequent second period even though the ball is entered into the starting hole. Here, the "hold icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "first period" is shown in FIGS. 53 (A) to (G). ”is set, and the “period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 pending digestion” of FIGS. 53 (H) to (L) in “second period” there is

In the icon display effect A, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed in the time saving state after the special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10). described as. The player hits to the right, the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28, and the game ball entering the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Ball (See FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 1 Time Saving State”). Either the first starting hole 30 or the second starting hole 21 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 75 and the second winning hole 76, and the game ball enters the opened starting holes 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) or the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs. Depending on the opening pattern of the electric tube 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (Fig. 13 (B ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 53(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents special figure 1 fluctuation), and notifies the special figure lottery result (here special figure 1 lottery result) by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "50 times of time saving remaining", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 change". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed.

In FIG. 53(A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game is played in the opened second starting hole 21. The ball enters the ball and the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is "1". That is, special figure 2 reservation has occurred. With the occurrence of special figure 2 suspension, one suspension icon 9B is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

FIG. 53(B) shows a state where the next special figure 1 variation of the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 53(A) is finished. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and enters the opened second starting hole 21. The number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is "2". That is, a new special figure 2 reservation has occurred. Along with the occurrence of special figure 2 suspension, one suspension icon 9B is added to the display screen 7a, and two suspension icons 9B are displayed.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and in FIG. 53(C), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "20 remaining time saving" is shown. Variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to special figure 1 variation is displayed. At this time, a specific-number-of-times notification image of "Time-saving remaining 20 times!" appears. After the end of the remaining 20 times of time-saving fluctuation, even if special figure 2-holding occurs, the holding icon 9B is not immediately additionally displayed, but is additionally displayed with a delayed timing. Two pending icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 pending obtained in FIGS. 53(A) and 53(B) are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and FIG. 53(D) shows a state when the remaining number of times of shortening is displayed as "10 remaining times of shortening". Variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to special figure 1 variation is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, the game ball enters the opened second starting hole 21, and enters the second game ball. The number of memories of 2 special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is "3". However, in spite of the occurrence of the new special figure 2 suspension, the suspension icon 9B is not added to the display screen 7a, and the display of the two suspension icons 9B is continued.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and FIG. 53(E) shows a state when the remaining number of times of shortening is displayed as "0 remaining times of shortening". Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation are stopped and displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, the game ball enters the opened second starting hole 21, and enters the second game ball. The number of memories of 2 special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is "4". However, in spite of the occurrence of the new special figure 2 suspension, the suspension icon 9B is not added to the display screen 7a, and the display of the two suspension icons 9B is continued. The game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state by the end of the time saving final variation.

After that, special figure 1 fluctuation is repeated, Figure 53 (F), the state where the first fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation) after the time saving end is executed is shown. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed. At a predetermined timing during this change, an effect is executed in which two pending icons 9B are additionally displayed and four pending icons 9B are displayed. That is, the two pending icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 pending obtained in FIGS. 53(D) and (E) are displayed with a delay. Thus, in FIG. 53 (A) ~ (G) in the "period from the start of the time saving until the special figure 1 suspension is digested and disappears", when there is a ball entering the second starting port 21 during the period , even if the timing of display is delayed, the special figure 2 hold will be displayed within the same period.

In FIG. 53 (G), the state where the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 53 (F) is completed is shown. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested. Because of the normal state, even if the player hits right and passes through the gate 28, the electric chew 29 is hardly opened (FIG. 13(A)). Therefore, there is almost no special figure 1 reservation or special figure 2 reservation is added, and the special figure 1 reservation that is preferentially digested is lost.

Since there is no reservation icon 9A corresponding to special figure 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 53(H), special figure 2 fluctuation due to digestion of special figure 2 reservation is started. At this time, the four pending icons 9B do not shift and remain displayed at the same position. The variable icon 9C is not displayed at the position (variable icon display position) where the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. Toku-zu 2 fluctuation is started in this state, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "3", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and the four reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed.

FIG. 53(I) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of smiley face character images are stopped and displayed together. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and the win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big win is achieved at approximately 1/312, and a small win is achieved at approximately 311/312. If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. There is a probability of about 1/2 that it will be a "3R time-saving one-time small hit", and a probability of about 1/2 will be a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is reported that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character images with smiley faces are the "3R time-saving one-time small winning" small winning. The display of the pending icon 9B is not reduced, and the four pending icons 9B are continuously displayed. The four holding icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 53(J) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big win game accompanying "3R one time reduction of time small win". Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "2", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and the four reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed. In one time reduction after a big win game accompanying "3R time reduction one time small win", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player hitting right, the game ball that entered the electric chew winning opening 34 is always Enter the second winning hole 76 (see FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 2 Time Saving State”). By entering the game ball into the second winning hole 76, the second start hole 21 is opened, and by entering the game ball into the second start hole 21, the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) Occur. As a result, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) increases by one and becomes "3". The four pending icons 9B are continuously displayed without increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons 9B. Thus, in FIG. 53 (H) ~ (L) "the period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 pending digestion", during the period Enter the second start port 21 Even if there is a sphere, the pending icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

FIG. 53(K) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of circular graphic images are stopped and displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big win is achieved at approximately 1/312, and a small win is achieved at approximately 311/312. If you hit a small hit in special figure 2, either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected in either case of time saving state or non-time saving state (here time saving state) . There is a probability of about 1/2 that it will be a "3R time-saving one-time small hit", and a probability of about 1/2 will be a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is reported that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic images are winning the "3R normal small winning" small winning. At this time, the oldest and leftmost one of the four suspended icons 9B displayed disappears, and the remaining three suspended icons 9B are continuously displayed. The three continuously displayed pending icons 9B are shifted and moved one place to the left. That is, here, the pending icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning/losing lottery result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning/losing lottery result is "3R time-saving one-time small win", but disappears when it is "3R normal small win". The three pending icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 53(L) shows the fluctuation of the normal state after the big win game associated with the "3R normal small win". Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "2", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and the three reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and there is always a win (big win or small win) (FIG. 9(A)). If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. This continues until there is no special figure 2 reservation. Thus, in FIG. 53 (H) ~ (L) "the period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 pending digestion", as shown in Figure 53 (J), the period Even if there is a ball in the second starting port 21 during the period, the special figure 2 suspension (suspension icon 9B) is not additionally displayed within the period.

[Icon display effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect B. FIG. The icon display performance is a performance in which an icon is displayed when the ball is entered into the starting hole during the first period, and the icon is not displayed in the subsequent second period even though the ball is entered into the starting hole. Here, the "hold icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "first period" is shown in Figs. 54 (A) to (D). ”is set, and the “period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 pending” in FIGS. 54 (E) to (J) is set in the “second period” there is

In the icon display performance B, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed in the time saving state after the special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10). described as. The player hits to the right, the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28, and the game ball entering the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Ball (See FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 1 Time Saving State”). Either the first starting hole 30 or the second starting hole 21 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 75 and the second winning hole 76, and the game ball enters the opened starting holes 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) or the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs. Depending on the opening pattern of the electric tube 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (Fig. 13 (B ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents special figure 1 fluctuation), and notifies the special figure lottery result (here special figure 1 lottery result) by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "50 times of time saving remaining", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 change". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed.

In FIG. 54 (A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game is played in the opened second start hole 21. The ball enters the ball and the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is "1". That is, special figure 2 reservation has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though the special figure 2 hold has occurred.

FIG. 54(B) shows a state where the next special figure 1 variation of the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 54(A) is finished. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and enters the opened second starting hole 21. The number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is "2". That is, a new special figure 2 reservation has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a although two special figure 2 holds have occurred.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and in FIG. 54(C), the state when the time saving remaining number display is "20 remaining time saving" is shown. Variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to special figure 1 variation is displayed. At this time, a specific number of times notification image of "It's 20 times left for time saving!" appears. Two hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 hold obtained in FIGS. 54(A) and 54(B) are additionally displayed at the end of the variation of the remaining 20 times of time saving.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and FIG. 54(D) shows a state when the remaining number of times of shortening is displayed as "10 remaining times of shortening". Variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to special figure 1 variation is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, the game ball enters the opened second start hole 21, and enters the second opening. The number of memories of 2 special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is "3". However, despite the occurrence of a new special figure 2 suspension, the suspension icon 9B is not added to the display screen 7a, and the display of the two suspension icons 9B is continued.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state by the end of the time saving final variation, the special figure 1 suspension disappears, and the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension is started. In the normal state, even if the player hits right and passes through the gate 28, the electric chew 29 is hardly opened (FIG. 13(A)). Therefore, there is almost no special figure 1 reservation or special figure 2 reservation added, and the special figure 1 reservation that is preferentially digested disappears.

At the timing when the special figure 1 reserve disappears, as shown in FIG. 54(E), one reserve icon 9B is additionally displayed, and three reserve icons 9B are displayed. That is, one pending icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 pending obtained in FIG. 54(D) is displayed with a delay. Thus, in FIG. 54 (A) ~ (E) in the "period from the start of the time saving to the end of the special figure 1 suspension", when there is a ball entering the second starting port 21 during the period , the special figure 2 hold is displayed within the same period even if the timing of display is delayed. After that, special figure 2 fluctuation due to digestion of special figure 2 suspension is started.

54 (E) ~ (J) ``Period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion until the special figure 2 suspension is digested and disappears'' is the icon display effect A Figure 53 (H) ~ ( It is the same production as L). In FIGS. 54(E) to (J), different from FIGS. 53(H) to (L), when the small win is won, all "3R normal small wins" are selected by chance. In FIG. 54 (E) ~ (J), similarly to FIG. 53 (J), the game ball enters the second starting port 21 and the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs and the second Even if the storage number of special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation number) increases by one, the number of reservation icons 9B does not increase or decrease. That is, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 pending digestion" in FIGS. Even if there is, the pending icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

As shown in FIG. 54(E), when the special figure 2 fluctuation due to the digestion of the special figure 2 suspension is started, the three suspension icons 9B are not shifted and the display is maintained at the position as it is. The variable icon 9C is not displayed at the position (variable icon display position) where the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. Toku-zu 2 fluctuation is started in this state, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "2", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and the three reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed.

FIG. 54(F) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of circular graphic images are stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big win is achieved at approximately 1/312 and a small win is achieved at approximately 311/312. If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. There is a probability of about 1/2 that it will be a "3R time-saving one-time small hit", and a probability of about 1/2 will be a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is informed that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic images are winning the "3R normal small winning" small winning. At this time, the oldest and leftmost one of the three suspended icons 9B displayed disappears, and the remaining two suspended icons 9B are continuously displayed. The two continuously displayed pending icons 9B are shifted and moved one place to the left. 53(H) to (L) of the icon display effect A, the pending icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning/losing lottery result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning/losing lottery result is "3R time-saving one-time small win", but disappears when it is "3R normal small win". The two holding icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 54(G) shows the fluctuation of the normal state after the big win game associated with the "3R normal small win". This is the same state as the icon display effect A in FIG. 53(L). Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "1", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and the two reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. This continues until there is no special figure 2 reservation.

FIG. 54(H) again shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of circular graphic images are stopped and displayed. Here, it is reported that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic images are winning the "3R normal small winning" prize again. At this time, of the two displayed pending icons 9B, the oldest and leftmost one disappears, and the remaining one pending icon 9B is continuously displayed. One continuously displayed pending icon 9B is shifted and moved one place to the left. As described above, the pending icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning/losing lottery results of the corresponding lottery, similar to the icon display effect A shown in FIGS. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning/losing lottery result is "3R time-saving one-time small win", but disappears when it is "3R normal small win". One pending icon 9B is continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 54(I) shows the fluctuation of the normal state after the big win game associated with the "3R normal small win". This is the same state as in FIG. 54(G). Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "0", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and one reservation icon 9B continues. is displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. This continues until there is no special figure 2 reservation.

FIG. 54(J) again shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of circular graphic images are stopped and displayed. Here, it is reported that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic images are winning the "3R normal small winning" prize again. At this time, the displayed single pending icon 9B disappears, and the display of the pending icon 9B disappears. As a result, the number "0" of the storage number of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) and the number of the reservation icons 9B match. As described above, the pending icon 9B does not disappear when the winning/losing lottery result is "3R time-saving one-time small win", but disappears when "3R normal small win". After that, a big win game accompanying "3R normal small win" is executed, and then a normal state is entered. 54 (E) ~ (J) "Period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion until the special figure 2 pending digestion disappears", Figure 53 (H) ~ (K) of the icon display effect A Similarly, even if there is a ball in the second starting port 21 during the period, the special figure 2 suspension (suspension icon 9B) is not additionally displayed within the period.

In FIG. 54(K), in the normal state after the big win game associated with the "3R normal small win", a character image of "End, please return to left-handed" is displayed. At this time, since there is no special figure 1 reservation or special figure 2 reservation, neither the reservation icon 9A nor the reservation icon 9B is displayed, and the fluctuation is not started. In this state, the player hits to the left, and when the ball hits the first starting hole 20, the pending icon 9A is displayed, and the shifting icon 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(L), the special figure 1 variation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variation display. Here, if the ball hits the first starting hole 20, the pending icon 9A is displayed.

[Icon display effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect C. FIG. Figures 55 (A) ~ (L), Figures 53 (H) ~ (L) of the icon display effect A, and Figures 54 (E) ~ (J) of the icon display effect B, "special figure 2 pending digestion It is the same effect as the period from when the is started until the special figure 2 suspension is digested and disappears. In Figures 55 (A) ~ (L), when the small winning is won, the order of the selected small winning winning types is different from Figures 53 (H) ~ (L) and Figures 54 (E) ~ (J) there is

FIG. 55(A) corresponds to FIG. 54(E). That is, in FIGS. 53 (A) to (G) of icon display effect A, and in FIGS. The period of" has passed, and in the normal state, the special figure 2 fluctuation due to the digestion of the special figure 2 suspension is started. At this time, the three pending icons 9B do not shift and remain displayed at the same position. The variable icon 9C is not displayed at the position (variable icon display position) where the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. Toku-zu 2 fluctuation is started in this state, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "2", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and the three reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed.

FIG. 55(B) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of smiley face character images are stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big win is achieved at approximately 1/312 and a small win is achieved at approximately 311/312. If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. There is a probability of about 1/2 that it will be a "3R time-saving one-time small hit", and a probability of about 1/2 will be a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is reported that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character images with smiley faces are the "3R time-saving one-time small winning" small winning. The display of the pending icon 9B is not reduced, and the three pending icons 9B are continuously displayed. The three pending icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55(C) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big win game accompanying "3R one time reduction of time small win". Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) decreases by one and becomes "1", while the display of the reservation icon 9B does not decrease, and the three reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed. In one time reduction after the big win game accompanying "3R time reduction one time small win", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player hitting right, as shown in FIG. The game ball that entered the mouth 34 will surely enter the second winning mouth 76 (see FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 2 Time Saving State”). By entering the game ball into the second winning hole 76, the second start hole 21 is opened, and by entering the game ball into the second start hole 21, the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) Occur. As a result, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) increases by one and becomes "2". Three pending icons 9B are continuously displayed without increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons 9B. In this way, in the "period from the start of special figure 2 pending digestion to the end of special figure 2 pending digestion" in FIGS. Even if there is a sphere, the pending icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

FIG. 55(E) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of smiley face character images are stopped and displayed together again. Here, it is reported that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character images with smiley faces are once again a small winning prize of "3R time-saving one-time small winning". The display of the pending icon 9B is not reduced, and the three pending icons 9B are continuously displayed. The three pending icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55(F) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big win game accompanying "3R one time reduction of time small win". As in FIG. 55(C), the special figure 2 variation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) decreases by one and becomes "1", while the display of the reservation icon 9B does not decrease, and the three reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed. In one time reduction after the big win game accompanying "3R time reduction one time small win", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player hitting right, as shown in FIG. The game ball that entered the mouth 34 will surely enter the second winning mouth 76 (see FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 2 Time Saving State”). By entering the game ball into the second winning hole 76, the second start hole 21 is opened, and by entering the game ball into the second start hole 21, the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) Occur. As a result, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) increases by one and becomes "2". Three pending icons 9B are continuously displayed without increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons 9B. In this way, in the "period from the start of special figure 2 pending digestion to the end of special figure 2 pending digestion" in FIGS. Even if there is a sphere, the pending icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

FIG. 55(H) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of circular graphic images are stopped and displayed. Here, it is reported that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic images are winning the "3R normal small winning" small winning. At this time, the oldest and leftmost one of the three suspended icons 9B displayed disappears, and the remaining two suspended icons 9B are continuously displayed. The two continuously displayed pending icons 9B are shifted and moved one place to the left. That is, here, the pending icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning/losing lottery result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning/losing lottery result is "3R time-saving one-time small win", but disappears when it is "3R normal small win". The two holding icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55(I) shows the fluctuation of the normal state after the big win game associated with the "3R normal small win". Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) decreases by one and becomes "1", while the display of the reservation icon 9B does not decrease, and the two reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed.

FIG. 55(J) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of smiley face character images are stopped and displayed together again. Here, it is reported that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character images with smiley faces are once again a small winning prize of "3R time-saving one-time small winning". Two pending icons 9B are continuously displayed without reducing the display of the pending icon 9B. The two holding icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55(K) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big win game accompanying "3R one time reduction of time small win". Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start fluctuation display. With the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is reduced by one to "0", while the display of the reservation icon 9B is not reduced, and the two reservation icons 9B continue. is displayed. In one time reduction after the big win game accompanying "3R time reduction one time small win", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player hitting right, as shown in FIG. 55 (L), the electric chew winning The game ball that entered the mouth 34 will surely enter the second winning mouth 76 (see FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 2 Time Saving State”). By entering the game ball into the second winning hole 76, the second start hole 21 is opened, and by entering the game ball into the second start hole 21, the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) Occur. As a result, the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) increases by one and becomes "1". Two pending icons 9B are continuously displayed without increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons 9B. In this way, in the "period from the start of special figure 2 pending digestion to the end of special figure 2 pending digestion" in FIGS. Even if there is a sphere, the pending icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. This continues until there is no special figure 2 reservation. In this way, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 pending digestion" in FIGS. 55 (A) to (L), FIGS. ), even if there is a ball in the second starting port 21 during the period, the special figure 2 suspension (suspension icon 9B) is not additionally displayed within the period.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the "first period from the start of time saving to the disappearance of the special figure 1 reservation" in FIGS. 21, the pending icon 9B is displayed, and the second period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 pending digestion in FIGS. 53 (H) to (L) period”, it is possible to execute an effect in which the pending icon 9B is not displayed even if the game ball enters the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 54 and 55 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the "second period from the start of the special figure 2 reservation digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 suspension" of FIGS. 53 (H) to (L), FIG. In the state where the display of the suspension icon 9B displayed in (A) to (G) "the first period from the start of the time saving until the special figure 1 suspension is digested and disappears" is maintained, the game ball is placed in the second It is possible to execute an effect in which the pending icon 9B is not additionally displayed even if the ball enters the starting hole 21.例文帳に追加According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 54 and 55 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold icon 9B , the display disappears after the corresponding win-lose lottery is executed (FIG. 53(K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 54 and 55 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIG. 53 (H) ~ (L) in the "second period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion until the special figure 2 suspension is digested and disappears", the pending icon 9B may continue to be displayed even during execution of a winning game if the corresponding winning lottery is won. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 54 and 55 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIG. 53 (H) ~ (L) in the "second period from the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion until the special figure 2 suspension is digested and disappears", the pending icon 9B, when winning in the corresponding win-loss lottery, if the win-loss lottery result is "3R time-saving one-time small win", it will not disappear and will continue to be displayed during the winning game execution, and in the case of "3R normal small win". disappears without being displayed continuously. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 54 and 55 are the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment,
When the game ball enters the second start port 21 in the "first period from the start of time saving to the end of the special figure 1 reservation" in FIGS. 53 (A) to (G) There is a case where the pending icon 9B is displayed at a delayed timing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 54 is also the same.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the icon display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the icon display effects A to C, as the first period "when the game ball enters the starting hole, the icon is displayed", FIGS. D) ``Period from the start of time saving until the special figure 1 reservation is digested and disappears'' is set, and as the second period ``the icon is not displayed even if the game ball enters the start port'', as shown in FIG. (H) ~ (L), Figure 54 (E) ~ (J), Figure 55 (A) ~ (L) "From the start of the special figure 2 pending digestion to the special figure 2 pending digestion period” shall be set. However, any period can be set for the first period and the second period.

[Modification 2]
In the icon display effects A to C, the holding icon 9B is exemplified as an icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole. However, the icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole may be an icon other than the hold icon 9B. For example, the icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole may be the holding icon 9A, or if it represents that the game ball has entered the starting hole, it may be an icon other than the holding icon. may For example, in the present application, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, it always wins (FIG. 9(A)). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, if an icon indicating that the hit is confirmed is displayed, this icon also indicates that the game ball of the present application has entered the starting port. It corresponds to the icon.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole;
During the first period, when the game ball enters the starting hole, the icon is displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the game ball enters the starting hole. It is possible to execute the effect that the icon is not displayed even if
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the second period, it is possible to perform an effect in which the icon is not additionally displayed even if the game ball enters the starting hole while the display of the icon displayed in the first period is maintained. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the second period, the icon disappears after the corresponding winning lottery is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the second period, the holding icon may continue to be displayed even during execution of the winning game if the corresponding win-lose lottery is won.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-4,
In the second period, when the corresponding winning/losing lottery is won, the holding icon may continue to be displayed during execution of the winning game or may disappear without being displayed continuously, depending on the winning type. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the first period, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the icon may be displayed at a timing delayed from the entry of the ball.
A gaming machine characterized by:

56 to 58, the winning type expectation degree suggesting effects A to C will be described below. This hit type expectation degree suggesting effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the normal symbol variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, the variation effect start command, etc., and when the instruction to execute the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect is included, from the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

[Hit Type Expectation Suggestion Production A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the winning type expectation degree suggestion effect A. FIG. Hit type expectation degree suggestion production is a production that executes a suggestion production that suggests the degree of expectation to win a specific winning pattern among multiple types of winning patterns of special or universal patterns during the fluctuation of special patterns or normal patterns. be. Here, "normal design" is set as "design", and "expectation to win with a specific winning type (specific winning design) in a normal design lottery" is set as "expectation to win with a specific winning design" It is Below, in the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state that is executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery, there are "long open 1" and "long open 2" as normal symbol types (Fig. 13 (B): special figure 1 time-saving state), and the effect of displaying the degree of expectation of winning one of the winning types is exemplified.

In the hit type expectation degree suggestion performance A, the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10) described as being The player hits to the right, and by passing through the gate 28, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 42 (FIG. 3), and when a predetermined variation time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result ( Normal pattern stop symbol) is displayed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are two types of per normal stop symbols corresponding to "long open 1" and "long open 2". Concretely, it is "normal figure _ winning pattern 2" and "normal figure _ winning pattern 3" of "special figure 1 time saving state" in FIG. 13(B). When "long opening 1" (normal figure _ winning pattern 2) is won and the electric chew 29 is opened, the game ball that entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the first winning opening 75 and the first starting opening 30 is opened, and the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) is generated by entering the first starting port 30. When the "long open 2" (normal figure _ winning pattern 3) is won and the electric chew 29 is opened, the game ball that entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76 and the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is generated by the ball entering the second starting port 21. The probability of selecting "long open 1" (normal pattern _ per pattern 2) is about 277/278, and the probability of selecting "long open 2" (normal pattern _ per pattern 3) is about 1/279. (Fig. 13(B), Fig. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 56(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The display screen 7a displays two pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "50 times of time saving remaining", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 change". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 56(A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the variable display of normal symbols is started on the normal symbol display device 42. In FIG.

In FIG. 56(B), when the variable display of normal symbols is started on the normal symbol display device 42, a rectangular image appears on the display screen 7a. The rectangular image is superimposed on the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and displayed on the front side thereof, and the variable-displayed decorative patterns 8X and 8Y are displayed within the rectangular image area. The decorative patterns 8X and 8Y are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8X and the right decorative pattern 8Y. The variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the normal patterns, and the stop display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the normal patterns. Notify the results of the general drawing lottery.

In FIG. 56(C), the rectangular image appearing on the display screen 7a is enlarged, and in addition to the variable display of decorative patterns 8X and 8Y, an expectation suggesting image of "Expectation per Acquisition of Special Figure 2: 50%" is displayed. be done. This expectation degree suggestion image suggests the degree of expectation to be elected with a specific winning type (specific winning pattern) in the normal drawing lottery currently fluctuating. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that the expectation of winning the type of winning the special figure 2 hold, that is, the possibility of selecting "long open 2" (normal figure _ per pattern 3) . That is, when this expectation suggestive image is displayed, "long open 2" (normal pattern _ winning pattern 3) is selected with a probability of 1/2, and other stop patterns (losing patterns) are selected with a probability of 1/2. , or "long open 1" (normal pattern _ per pattern 2)) is selected. FIGS. 56(I) and 56(J) show the case where the "long open 1" is selected, and FIGS. 56(K) and 56(L) show the case where the losing symbol is selected. In this way, the expectation suggesting image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific win type is relatively high, and it also suggests that the expectation of winning another win type is relatively low. will be For example, the higher the degree of expectation per special figure 2 acquisition, the lower the degree of expectation per special figure 1 acquisition. This point is different from the conventional hit expectation. The conventional hit expectation level is the expectation level of whether or not a win will occur, and when there are a plurality of types of win types, the expectation level is high for all types.

In FIG. 56(D), after FIG. 56(C), the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as "normal symbol_win symbol 3". In accordance with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed in the rectangular image are stopped at "77", and the result notification image of "win special figure 2" is displayed. By this result notification image, it is notified that you have won the type of winning special figure 2 reservation, that is, that "long open 2" has been selected.

In FIG. 56(E), after FIG. 56(D), the game ball that has won the "long open 2" and the electric chew 29 is opened, and entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76. A balled state is shown. The second starting hole 21 is opened by the ball entering the second winning hole 76, and the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is generated by the ball entering the second starting opening 21. - 特許庁As a result, the pending icon 9B is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and FIG. 56(F) shows the state when the remaining number of times of shortening is "0 times remaining". Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation are stopped and displayed. At this time, there is no special figure 1 reservation, and special figure 2 reservation digestion is started. The game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state by the end of the time saving final variation.

FIG. 56(G) shows a state in which a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of smiley face character images are displayed in a stopped state. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and the win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big win is achieved at approximately 1/312, and a small win is achieved at approximately 311/312. If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. There is a probability of about 1/2 that it will be a "3R time-saving one-time small hit", and a probability of about 1/2 will be a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is reported that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character images with smiley faces are the "3R time-saving one-time small winning" small winning.

In FIG. 56(H), after the jackpot game is over, the obtained ball number image of "3000 balls won after jackpot game" is displayed. The number of obtained balls displayed in the character image may be the number of actually obtained balls, or may be the number of obtained balls planned according to the type of winning instead of the actual number of balls. . Also, the winning ball number image may be displayed before the start of the jackpot game. In this case, the acquired ball number image may display the expected number of acquired balls according to the winning type. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). Therefore, when the special figure 2 reservation occurs, it will be in a state where it is promised to obtain a predetermined amount of output balls by the winning game. In other words, when the pending icon 9B is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is suggested that a predetermined amount of balls will be obtained by the game after that. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, when the "long open 2" (normal pattern _ winning pattern 3) is selected in the winning of the normal symbol lottery, the second start port 21 is opened, and the ball enters the second start port 21. A special figure 2 hold will occur. Therefore, when "long open 2" is selected in the winning of the normal symbol lottery, it is promised to obtain a predetermined amount of output balls by the game after that. From this, it can be said that the character image of "expectation per acquisition of special figure 2: 50%" displayed in FIG.

FIG. 56(I) is executed after FIG. 56(C) instead of FIG. 56(D). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as "normal symbol_win symbol 2". In accordance with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed in the rectangular image are stopped at "22", and the result notification image of "per acquisition of one special figure" is displayed. As a result of the notification image, although the expectation suggestion image of "expectation per acquisition of special figure 2: 50%" was displayed in FIG. That is, the selection of "long open 1" is notified.

In FIG. 56(J), after FIG. 56(I), the game ball that has won the "long open 1" and the electric chew 29 is opened, and entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the first winning opening 75. A balled state is shown. The first starting hole 30 is opened by the ball entering the second winning hole 76, and the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) is generated by the ball entering the first starting opening 30. - 特許庁As a result, the pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

FIG. 56(K) is executed after FIG. 56(C) instead of FIG. 56(D). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In accordance with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8X and 8Y displayed in the rectangular image are stopped at "34", and the result notification image of "losing" is displayed. By this result notification image, it is notified that the result is lost, although the "expectation degree per acquisition of special figure 2: 50%" expectation degree suggestion image is displayed in FIG. 56(C). In FIG. 56 (L), after FIG. 56 (K), neither special figure 1 suspension nor special figure 2 suspension occurs, and the result notification image disappears.

[Hit Type Expectation Suggestion Production B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the winning type expectation degree suggesting effect B. FIG. Hit type expectation degree suggestion production is a production that executes a suggestion production that suggests the degree of expectation to win a specific winning pattern among multiple types of winning patterns of special or universal patterns during the fluctuation of special patterns or normal patterns. be. Here, "normal design" is set as "design", and "expectation of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning design) in a normal design lottery" is set as "expectation to win with a specific winning design" It is Below, in the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state that is executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery, there are "long open 1" and "long open 2" as normal symbol types (Fig. 13 (B): special figure 1 time-saving state), and the effect of displaying the expectation of winning one of the winning types is illustrated.

In the hit type expectation degree suggestion performance B, similar to the hit type expectation degree suggestion performance A (Fig. 56), the special figure in the time saving state after the big hit game of the special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times big hit" (Fig. 10) Variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) will be described as being executed. The player hits to the right, and by passing through the gate 28, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 42 (FIG. 3), and when a predetermined variation time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result ( Normal pattern stop symbol) is displayed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are two types of per normal stop symbols corresponding to "long open 1" and "long open 2". Concretely, they are "normal figure _ winning pattern 2" and "normal figure _ winning pattern 3" of "special figure 1 time saving state" in FIG. 13(B). When the "long open 1" (normal figure _ winning pattern 2) is won and the electric chew 29 is opened, the game ball that entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the first winning opening 75 and the first starting opening 30 is opened, and the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) is generated by entering the first starting port 30. When the "long open 2" (normal figure _ winning pattern 3) is won and the electric chew 29 is opened, the game ball that entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76 and the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is generated by entering the second starting port 21. The probability of selecting "long open 1" (normal pattern _ per pattern 2) is about 277/278, and the probability of selecting "long open 2" (normal pattern _ per pattern 3) is about 1/279. (Fig. 13(B), Fig. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 57(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The display screen 7a displays two pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "50 times of time saving remaining", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 change". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 57(A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the variable display of normal symbols is started on the normal symbol display device 42. In FIG.

In FIG. 57(B), when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "789" while the normal patterns are being displayed on the normal pattern display 42, the color of the stopped left decorative pattern 8L is changed. It has a different color than usual. This suggests that the degree of expectation to be elected in a specific hit type (specific hit pattern) is a predetermined value in the general pattern lottery currently fluctuating. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L whose color has changed is the expectation suggesting image. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that the expectation of winning the type of winning the special figure 2 hold, that is, the possibility of selecting "long open 2" (normal figure _ per pattern 3) . That is, when this expectation suggestive image is displayed, "long open 2" (normal pattern _ winning pattern 3) is selected with a probability of 1/2, and other stop patterns (losing patterns) are selected with a probability of 1/2. , or "long open 1" (normal pattern _ per pattern 2)) is selected. FIG. 57(E) shows the case where "long open 1" is selected, and FIG. 57(F) shows the case where the lost symbol is selected. The expectation suggesting image suggests that the expectation of winning in a specific winning type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in other winning types is relatively low. .

In FIG. 57(C), after FIG. 57(B), the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as "normal symbol_win symbol 3". At the same time, the display screen 7a displays a result notification image of "You did it!". By this result notification image, it is notified that you have won the type of winning special figure 2 reservation, that is, that "long open 2" has been selected.

In FIG. 57(D), after FIG. 57(C), the game ball that entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76 after winning with "long open 2" and the electric chew 29 opens. A balled state is shown. The second starting hole 21 is opened by the ball entering the second winning hole 76, and the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is generated by the ball entering the second starting opening 21. - 特許庁As a result, the pending icon 9B is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, an effect similar to that of FIG.

FIG. 57(E) is executed after FIG. 57(B) instead of FIG. 57(C). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as "normal symbol_win symbol 2". In accordance with this, a result notification image of "fair" is displayed. With this result notification image, in FIG. 57 (B), although the expectation degree suggestive image of the left decorative pattern 8L whose color has changed is displayed, the per type of winning the special figure 1 reservation is won, that is, , "long open 1" is selected. After that, an effect similar to that shown in FIG.

FIG. 57(F) is executed after FIG. 57(B) instead of FIG. 57(C). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In accordance with this, a result notification image of "unfortunate" is displayed. With this result notification image, it is notified that the player has failed despite the fact that the expectation level suggesting image of the left decorative pattern 8L whose color has changed is displayed in FIG. 57(B). After that, an effect similar to that shown in FIG.

FIG. 57(G) is executed instead of FIG. 57(B). Specifically, an expectation suggesting image of "there may be something good" is displayed while the normal symbol display 42 is displaying the variable normal symbols. Similar to FIG. 57(B), this expectation level suggestion image suggests that the expectation level of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning pattern) is a predetermined value in the normal drawing lottery currently fluctuating. there is Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that the expectation of winning the type of winning the special figure 2 hold, that is, the possibility of selecting "long open 2" (normal figure _ per pattern 3) . As described above, the expectation level suggesting image is not limited to the color change of the decorative pattern, and may be a predetermined character image.

FIG. 57(H) is executed instead of FIG. 57(B), like FIG. 57(G). Specifically, while the normal symbol display 42 is displaying the variable normal symbols, an expectation suggesting image of "there will definitely be something good" is displayed. Similar to FIG. 57(B), this expectation level suggestion image suggests that the expectation level of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning pattern) is a predetermined value in the normal drawing lottery currently fluctuating. there is Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that the expectation of winning the type of winning the special figure 2 hold, that is, the possibility of selecting "long open 2" (normal figure _ per pattern 3) . In this way, the expectation suggesting image may be a character image with arbitrary content.

57(I) and (J) are executed instead of FIG. 57(B), like FIG. 57(G) and FIG. 57(H). Specifically, the button image BTN is displayed on the normal symbol display device 42 while the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. This button image BTN, similarly to the left decorative pattern 8L in which the color of FIG. It is an expectation degree suggesting image that suggests that it is a value. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that the expectation of winning the type of winning the special figure 2 hold, that is, the possibility of selecting "long open 2" (normal figure _ per pattern 3) . Thus, the expectation suggesting image may be any image.

FIG. 57(K) is executed instead of FIG. 57(B), like FIGS. 57(G) to (J). More specifically, while the normal symbols are being varied and displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as smiley face character images, respectively. The static display of the character image with a smiley face wins in a specific winning type (specific winning pattern) in the normal drawing lottery that is currently fluctuating, similar to the left decorative pattern 8L in which the color has changed in FIG. 57(B). It is an expectation degree suggestion image which suggests that the expectation degree is a predetermined value. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that the expectation of winning the type of winning the special figure 2 hold, that is, the possibility of selecting "long open 2" (normal figure _ per pattern 3) . In this way, the expectation suggestive image may appear in various forms.

[Hit Type Expectation Suggestion Production C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the winning type expectation degree suggesting effect C. FIG. Hit type expectation degree suggestion production is a production that executes a suggestion production that suggests the degree of expectation to win a specific winning pattern among multiple types of winning patterns of special or universal patterns during the fluctuation of special patterns or normal patterns. be. Here, "special design" is set as the "design", and "expectation for winning with a specific winning design" is "winning with a specific winning type (specific winning design) in the first or second special design lottery" expectations are set.

FIG. 58 (A) ~ (C) will be described assuming that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state. The player hits to the left, and when the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3) wins a prize in the first start port 20, the special symbols are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3), and when a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. A special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to is displayed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are three types of special stop symbols that correspond to "5R time-saving 150 times jackpot", "5R time-saving 100 times jackpot", and "3R normal small hit (V passage practically impossible)". Specifically, they are "special figure 1_time saving pattern 1" and "special figure 1_time saving pattern 2" and "special figure 1_time saving no small winning pattern" of "non-time saving state" of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The display screen 7a displays two pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a changing special figure display indicating the type of special figure currently in fluctuation, represented as "special figure 1 variation", is displayed.

In FIG. 58(B), an expectation suggesting image of "5R time saving 100 times jackpot expectation: 50%" appears on the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are overlapped on the front side of the variable display. Is displayed. This expectation degree suggesting image suggests the degree of expectation to be elected with a specific winning type (specific winning pattern) in the special drawing lottery currently fluctuating. Here, it is suggested that the expectation of winning the 5R time saving 100 times jackpot, that is, the possibility of selecting "special figure 1_time saving pattern 2" is 50%. That is, when this expectation suggestive image is displayed, "special figure 1_time saving pattern 2" is selected with a probability of 1/2, and other stop symbols (losing pattern, "special figure 1_ Time saving pattern 1”, “Special figure 1_no time saving small winning pattern”) are selected. The expectation suggesting image suggests that the expectation of winning in a specific winning type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in other winning types is relatively low. .

After that, the variable display of the special symbols ends on the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3), and the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) "special symbol 1_time saving symbol 2" is determined and stopped. In accordance with this, as shown in FIG. 58(C), on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "222", and the winning type of "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" is won. That is, it is notified that "special figure 1_time saving pattern 2" has been selected.

FIGS. 58(D)-(E) are executed after FIG. 58(A) instead of FIGS. 58(B)-(C). Specifically, an expectation suggesting image of “5R time saving 150 times jackpot expectation: 30%” appears on the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R overlapping the variable display. be. This expectation degree suggesting image suggests the degree of expectation of being elected with a specific hit type (specific winning pattern) in the special drawing lottery currently fluctuating. Here, it is suggested that the expectation of winning the 5R time saving 150 times jackpot, that is, the possibility of selecting "special figure 1_time saving pattern 1" is 30%. That is, when this expectation suggestive image is displayed, "special figure 1_time saving pattern 1" is selected with a probability of 3/10, and other stop symbols (losing pattern, "special figure 1_ Time saving pattern 2”, “Special figure 1_no time saving small winning pattern”) are selected. The expectation suggesting image suggests that the expectation of winning in a specific winning type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in other winning types is relatively low. .

After that, the variable display of the special symbols ends on the first special symbol display 41a (Fig. 3), and "special figure 1_time saving symbol 1" is determined and stopped as a special symbol (special symbol stop symbol). In accordance with this, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "777", and the winning type of "5R time saving 150 times jackpot" is won. That is, it is notified that "special figure 1_time saving pattern 1" has been selected.

Fig. 58(F) is executed after Fig. 58(A) instead of Fig. 58(B). Time-saving 100 times jackpot Expectation: 30%” appears, and is displayed on the front side of the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. , In the special drawing lottery currently fluctuating, it suggests the expectation of winning with a specific hit type (specific winning pattern).Here, the expectation of winning the 5R time-saving 150 times jackpot, that is, "special drawing There is a 15% possibility that 1_time saving pattern 1” will be selected, and the expectation of winning the 5R time saving 100 times jackpot, that is, the possibility that “special figure 1_time saving pattern 2” will be selected is 30%. That is, when this expectation suggestion image is displayed, "Special Figure 1 _ Short Time Design 1" is selected with a probability of 15/100, and "Special Figure 1 _ Short Time Design 1" is selected with a probability of 30/100. 2" is selected, and other stop patterns (losing pattern, "special figure 1_time saving small winning pattern") are selected with a probability of 55/100. In addition to showing the degree of expectation for one type of winning, it may be configured to show the degree of expectation for each of a plurality of types of winning. If it is suggested that it is relatively high, it will also be suggested that the expectation of winning in other types of winning is relatively low.

In Figure 58 (G) ~ (H), it will be described assuming that the special figure 2 variation is being executed in the time saving state. Due to the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation, the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b (Fig. 3), and after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result. is displayed, and the player is informed of the result of the lottery. Here, there are 4 types of winning special stop symbols corresponding to "5R time-saving one-time big win", "3R time-saving one-time big win", "3R time-saving one-time small win", and "3R normal small win". Specifically, "special figure 2_time saving pattern 2" and "special figure 2_time saving pattern 3" of "time saving state" in FIG. Winning pattern 2”.

As shown in FIG. 58(G), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 2 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 2 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9B representing the special figure 2 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a changing special figure display indicating the type of the special figure currently in fluctuation, which is represented as "special figure 2 fluctuation", is displayed.

In FIG. 58 (H), an expectation suggesting image of "3R time-saving one-time small hit expectation: 90%" appears on the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are superimposed on the variable display and the front side of these to be displayed. This expectation degree suggesting image suggests the degree of expectation of being elected with a specific hit type (specific winning pattern) in the special drawing lottery currently fluctuating. Here, it is suggested that the expectation of winning the 3R time-saving one-time small hit, that is, the possibility of selecting “special figure 2_time-saving small winning pattern 2” is 90%. That is, when this expectation suggestive image is displayed, the probability of 9/10 is that “special figure 2_time saving small winning symbol 2” is selected, and the probability of 1/10 is that other stop symbols (“special figure 2_ Time saving pattern 2", "Special figure 2_time saving pattern 3", "Special figure 2_no time saving small winning pattern 2") are selected. No loss pattern is set in special figure 2. The expectation suggesting image suggests that the expectation of winning in a specific winning type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in other winning types is relatively low. .

FIG. 58(I) is executed after FIG. 58(G) instead of FIG. 58(H). Specifically, on the display screen 7a, an expectation suggestive image with “3R time-saving 1-time jackpot expectation: 10%” and “3R time-saving 1 time small-hit expectation: 40%” appears, and the decorative pattern 8L , 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of them. This expectation degree suggesting image suggests the degree of expectation to be elected with a specific winning type (specific winning pattern) in the special drawing lottery currently fluctuating. Here, the expectation of winning the 3R time-saving one-time small hit, that is, the possibility of selecting “special figure 2_time saving pattern 3” is 10%, and “special figure 2_time saving small winning pattern 2” is selected. It has been suggested that there is a 40% chance of being In this way, the win type expectation degree suggesting effect may be configured to indicate the expectation degree of each of a plurality of types of wins, in addition to indicating the expectation degree of one specific type of win.

FIG. 58(J) is executed after FIG. 58(G) instead of FIG. 58(H). Specifically, on the display screen 7a, “3R time-saving 1 time big win expectation: 10%”, “3R time-saving 1 time small winning expectation: 30%” and “3R normal small winning expectation: 10%” are written together. The expected degree suggestive image appears, and is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R while being superimposed on the variable display. This expectation degree suggesting image suggests the degree of expectation of being elected with a specific hit type (specific winning pattern) in the special drawing lottery currently fluctuating. Here, the expectation of winning the 3R time-saving one-time small hit, that is, the possibility of selecting “special figure 2_time saving pattern 3” is 10%, and “special figure 2_time saving small winning pattern 2” is selected. It is suggested that the possibility of being selected is 30%, and the possibility of selecting "special figure 2_no time saving small winning pattern 2" is 10%. In this way, in the win type expectation degree suggesting effect, in addition to indicating the expectation degree of a specific type of win, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for each of a plurality of types of wins.

In FIG. 58 (K), after one of the productions of FIGS. 58 (H) to (K), a 3R time-saving one-time small win is won, and three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of smiley face character images. A state in which they are stopped and displayed together is shown. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big win is achieved at approximately 1/312 and a small win is achieved at approximately 311/312. If you hit the special figure 2, either the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state), either "3R time saving 1 time small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected. be. There is a probability of about 1/2 that it will be a "3R time-saving one-time small hit", and a probability of about 1/2 will be a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is reported that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character images with smiley faces are the "3R time-saving one-time small winning" small winning.

In FIG. 58(L), after the jackpot game is over, a captured ball number image of "3000 balls won after jackpot game" is displayed. The number of obtained balls displayed in the character image may be the number of actually obtained balls, or may be the number of obtained balls planned according to the type of winning instead of the actual number of balls. . Also, the winning ball number image may be displayed before the start of the jackpot game. In this case, the acquired ball number image may display the expected number of acquired balls according to the winning type. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special figure 2 lottery, and a win (big win or small win) is guaranteed (FIG. 9(A)). Therefore, when the special figure 2 reservation occurs, it will be in a state where it is promised to obtain a predetermined amount of output balls by the winning game. In other words, when the expectation level suggesting images of FIGS. 58(H) to (J) are displayed on the display screen 7a, it is suggested that a predetermined number of balls will be obtained through the game after that. From this, it can be said that the expectation suggesting images displayed in FIGS. 58(H) to (J) suggest the expectation of obtaining a predetermined number of balls to be paid out.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the display screen 7a indicates the degree of expectation indicating the degree of expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol among a plurality of types of winning symbols (normal symbols). A suggestive effect of displaying a suggestive image can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 57 and 58 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the suggestive effect is executed during the symbol variation by the normal symbol display device 42 . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 57 and 58 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(C), in the suggestive effect, when it is suggested that the expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol is relatively high, the specific winning symbol is displayed. It is suggested that the expectation of winning with a different winning pattern is relatively low. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 57 and 58 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the normal symbol display device 42 can display the variation of the normal symbol, and the suggestive effect is winning with a specific winning symbol in the normal symbol. Indicate expectations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 57 is also the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56(B) and (C), the display screen 7a displays a variable display effect of the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y corresponding to the variation of the normal symbols during execution of the suggestive effect. to run. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the suggestive effect suggests the degree of expectation for obtaining a predetermined amount of payout balls. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hit type expectation degree suggestive effect A, the normal symbol lottery was almost hit, but there was a possibility that it was slightly lost. However, it may be configured so that the game will always win without losing. In addition, the number of winning balls may be the same or different for any winning type in the normal symbol lottery.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
effect display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising symbol display means capable of displaying symbol variations,
The symbol display means can display a plurality of types of winning symbols,
The effect display means is capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning with the specific winning symbol among the plurality of types of winning symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The suggestive effect is executed during the pattern variation by the pattern display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
In the suggestion performance, when it is suggested that the expectation of winning with the specific winning pattern is relatively high, the expectation of winning with a winning pattern different from the specific winning pattern is relatively low. is suggested,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
The symbol display means is capable of displaying variations in normal symbols,
The suggestive effect suggests the expectation of winning with a specific winning pattern in the normal pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
The effect display means executes a variable display effect of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variation of the normal symbols during execution of the suggestive effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
The suggestive effect suggests the degree of expectation for obtaining a predetermined amount of balls,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon delay display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. This icon delay display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for the number of pending balls received from the sub-control board 90, the command for specifying the game state, the command for starting the variable effect, and the like. The corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

[Icon delay display effect A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the icon delay display effect A. FIG. The icon delay display effect is an effect in which an icon is displayed at a timing after the ball enters the starting hole when the ball enters the starting hole. Here, the "holding icon 9A" is set as the "icon", and the "first start opening 20" is set as the "start opening".

In the icon delay display effect A, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state. The player hits to the left, and when the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3) wins a prize in the first start port 20, the special symbols are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3). A special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to is displayed, and the player is notified of the lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents special figure 1 fluctuation), and notifies the special figure lottery result (here special figure 1 lottery result) by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, there are also a game state display indicated as "normal state" and a changing special figure display indicating the type of special figure currently in fluctuation indicated as "special figure 1 fluctuation". is displayed.

In FIG. 59(A), at this time, the game ball enters the first start port 20 and the memory number of the first special figure reservation (the number of special figure 1 reservations) changes from "1" to "2". there is That is, the second special figure 1 reservation (second reservation) has occurred. However, although the second Toku-zu 1 suspension has occurred, the state in which only one suspension icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a continues.

FIG. 59(B) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 59(A) has ended. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested. Then, at the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of memories of the first special figure reservation (the number of special figure 1 reservations) changes from "2" to "1", and on the display screen 7a, the reservation icon 9A shifts Then, it becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Due to the shift movement of the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A disappears. That is, even though there is one special figure 1 pending, the pending icon 9A is not displayed. And special figure 1 variation is executed.

In FIG. 59(C), after FIG. 59(B), on the display screen 7a, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20 and the memory number of the 1st special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation number) is changed from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 1 reservation has occurred. However, in spite of the fact that two special figure 1 suspensions have occurred, the state in which no suspension icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a continues.

Figure 59 (D) is after Figure 59 (C), after a predetermined period of time from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the two special figure 1 pending are newly displayed at the same time. be. Here, when one special figure 1 suspension occurs newly, the suspension icon 9A is not displayed, and two suspensions are performed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the special figure fluctuation when the second special figure 1 suspension occurs A "first delayed display effect" in which the icon 9A is displayed with a delay is being executed. In addition, in the "first delayed display effect", the timing at which the pending icon 9A is displayed may be other than the above. For example, when one special figure 1 suspension occurs newly, the suspension icon 9A may not be displayed, and two suspension icons 9A may be displayed when the second special figure 1 suspension occurs. Alternatively, when one special figure 1 suspension occurs newly, the suspension icon 9A is not displayed, and after the second special figure 1 suspension occurs, two suspension icons 9A may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. .

FIG. 59(E) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 59(D) has ended. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested. Then, at the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of memories of the first special figure reservation (the number of special figure 1 reservations) changes from "2" to "1", and on the display screen 7a, the reservation icon 9A shifts Then, it becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. The pending icon 9A becomes one by shift movement of the pending icon 9A. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20 and the memory number of the 1st special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation number) is changed from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 1 reservation has occurred. However, in spite of the occurrence of two special figure 1 suspension, only one suspension icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. And special figure 1 variation is executed.

In FIG. 59(F), after FIG. 59(E), on the display screen 7a, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state in which two pending icons 9A are displayed. Here, when one special figure 1 suspension occurs newly, the suspension icon 9A is not displayed, and the suspension icon 9A is displayed after a predetermined period of time from the start of the next special figure variation "second delay display performance” is executed. In addition, in the "second delay display effect", the timing at which the pending icon 9A is displayed may be other than the above. For example, after the elapse of a predetermined period after one special figure 1 suspension has newly occurred, the corresponding suspension icon 9A may be displayed with a delay. Alternatively, after one special figure 1 suspension has newly occurred, the suspension icon 9A may be displayed with a delay at the time of variation production after the predetermined number of times (1 or more) special figure variation.

FIG. 59(H) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 59(G) has ended. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested. Then, at the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of memories of the first special figure reservation (the number of special figure 1 reservations) changes from "2" to "1", and on the display screen 7a, the reservation icon 9A shifts Then, it becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. The pending icon 9A becomes one by shift movement of the pending icon 9A. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20 and the memory number of the 1st special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation number) is changed from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 1 reservation (second reservation) has occurred. However, in spite of the occurrence of two special figure 1 suspension, only one suspension icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. And special figure 1 variation is executed.

In FIG. 59(I), after FIG. 59(H), on the display screen 7a, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20 and the memory number of the 1st special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation number) is changed from "2" to "3". That is, the third special figure 1 reservation has occurred. However, although three special figure 1 suspensions have occurred, only one suspension icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 59 (J), after a predetermined period of time from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 3 pending), the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second pending is newly displayed, and a total of two pending icons 9A are displayed.

Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(L), a pending icon 9A corresponding to the remaining one special figure 1 pending (third pending) that has not been displayed is newly displayed, and a total of three pending The icon 9A is displayed. Here, when one special figure 1 suspension occurs newly, the suspension icon 9A is not displayed, and the two suspension icons 9A shift the timing in the special figure fluctuation when the second special figure 1 suspension occurs A "third delayed display effect" is being executed in which the characters are displayed with a delay in order. In the "third delayed display effect", the timing at which the first pending icon 9A is displayed and the timing at which the second pending icon 9A is displayed can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the variation in which the second special figure 1 suspension has occurred, the first suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first timing from the start of the variation, and the second suspension icon 9A is displayed at the second timing. may Alternatively, the first pending icon 9A may be displayed during the fluctuation in which the second special figure 1 pending has occurred, and the second pending icon 9A may be displayed during the fluctuation after the next fluctuation.

[Icon delay display effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the icon delay display effect B. FIG. The icon delay display effect is an effect in which an icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry of the ball when the ball enters the starting hole. Here, the "holding icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "second starting opening 21" is set as the "starting opening".

In the icon delay display effect B, special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed in a time saving state after the jackpot game of special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10) described as a thing. The player hits to the right, the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28, and the game ball entering the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Ball (See FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 1 Time Saving State”). Either the first starting hole 30 or the second starting hole 21 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 75 and the second winning hole 76, and the game ball enters the opened starting holes 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) or the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs. Depending on the opening pattern of the electric tube 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (Fig. 13 (B ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 60(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The display screen 7a displays two pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "time saving remaining 2 times", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 change". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 60(A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting hole 21 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 60(B), the game ball enters the opened second start port 21 and the memory number of the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation number) changes from "0" to "1" is changing. That is, the first special figure 2 reservation (first reservation) has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a although the first special figure 2 hold has occurred.

In FIG. 60(C), after FIG. 60(B), during the same fluctuation, the game ball further passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the first winning hole 75 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the first starting port 30 is opened. As shown in FIG. 60 (D), the game ball enters the opened first start port 30, and the third special figure 1 reservation (third reservation) occurs, and the third is newly displayed. That is, while the special figure 2 suspension does not display the suspension icon 9B after occurrence, the special figure 1 suspension displays the suspension icon 9A immediately after winning.

In FIG. 60(E), after FIG. 60(D), during the same fluctuation, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the second starting port 21 is opened. As shown in FIG. 60 (F), the game ball enters the opened second start port 21 and the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) changes from "1" to "2" is changing. That is, the second special figure 2 reservation (second reservation) has occurred. However, in spite of the occurrence of two special figure 2 suspension, the suspension icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, while the special figure 1 reservation is displayed immediately after the winning, the reservation icon 9A is displayed, the reservation icon 9B is not displayed even if the special figure 2 reservation is generated.

In FIG. 60(G), after FIG. 60(F), during the same fluctuation, the game ball further passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the first winning hole 75 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the first starting port 30 is opened. As shown in FIG. 60 (H), the game ball enters the opened first start port 30, and the fourth special figure 1 reservation (fourth reservation) is generated, and the fourth is newly displayed. That is, while the special figure 2 suspension does not display the suspension icon 9B after the occurrence, the special figure 1 suspension quickly displays the suspension icon 9A after winning.

FIG. 60 (I) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIGS. 60 (A) to (H) is completed. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested. Then, on the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A shifts to become a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Due to the shift movement of the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A is reduced by one to three. And special figure 1 variation is executed.

As shown in FIG. 60(J), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during the special figure 1 variation. On the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, there is also a display of the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "one time remaining", and a special figure currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 change". A special figure display during variation indicating the type and a time saving state final variation display indicating that it is the last variation of the time saving state represented as "last one time" are displayed. Here, the last variation of the time saving state is shown.

In FIG. 60 (K), after FIG. 60 (J), a state is shown in which a predetermined period has passed since the special figure 1 fluctuation started. On the display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation continues. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the suspension icon 9B corresponding to the first suspension is newly displayed among the two special figure 2 suspensions (first suspension, second suspension) that were not displayed. .

Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60(L), a pending icon 9B corresponding to the remaining one special figure 2 pending (second pending) that has not been displayed is newly displayed, and a total of two pending The icon 9B is displayed. Here, the hold icon 9B is not displayed for the special figure 2 hold that occurred before the predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the time saving final fluctuation after the start of the time saving final fluctuation, and the delay to be displayed collectively after the predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the time saving final fluctuation. A display effect is executed. When the reserved icons 9B are collectively displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period of time from the start of the time saving final variation, a plurality of reserved icons 9B may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed one by one in order. When the icons are displayed one after another, the timing at which the first pending icon 9B is displayed and the timing at which the second pending icon 9B is displayed can be arbitrarily set.

[Icon delay display effect C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the icon delay display effect C. FIG. The icon delay display effect is an effect in which an icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry of the ball when the ball enters the starting hole. Here, the "holding icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "second starting opening 21" is set as the "starting opening".

In the icon delay display effect C, special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed in a time saving state after the jackpot game of special figure 1 jackpot type "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" (Fig. 10) described as a thing. The player hits to the right, the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28, and the game ball entering the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Ball (See FIG. 13(B) “Special Figure 1 Time Saving State”). Either the first starting hole 30 or the second starting hole 21 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 75 and the second winning hole 76, and the game ball enters the opened starting holes 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) or the second special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) occurs. Depending on the opening pattern of the electric tube 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (Fig. 13 (B ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 61(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a during special figure 1 variation. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed but also a state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Represents the special figure 1 fluctuation), and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The display screen 7a displays two pending icons 9A representing special figure 1 pending and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, the display screen 7a also displays the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "remaining 12 times of time saving", and the number of special figures currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special figure display during variation indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 61(A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting hole 21 is opened. A game ball enters the opened second starting port 21 and the number of memories of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is changed from "0" to "1". That is, the first special figure 2 reservation (first reservation) has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a although the first special figure 2 hold has occurred.

FIG. 61(B) shows the state after the special figure 1 variation is executed multiple times from FIG. 61(A). Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation are displayed in a variable manner, and "remaining 5 times of time saving" is displayed as the number of times of remaining time saving. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28 and enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting hole 21 is opened. A game ball enters the opened second starting port 21, and the number of memory of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is changed from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 2 reservation (second reservation) has occurred. However, in spite of the occurrence of two special figure 2 suspension, the suspension icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Figure 61 (C) shows the state after the special figure 1 variation is executed multiple times from Figure 61 (B). Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation are displayed in a variable manner, and "remaining 2 times of time saving" is displayed as the number of times of remaining time saving. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28 and enters the second winning hole 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting hole 21 is opened. A game ball enters the opened second starting port 21, and the number of memory of the second special figure reservation (the number of special figure 2 reservations) is changed from "2" to "3". That is, the third special figure 2 reservation (third reservation) has occurred. However, in spite of the occurrence of three special figure 2 suspensions, the suspension icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 61(D), after FIG. 61(C), during the same fluctuation, the game ball further passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the first winning hole 75 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the first starting port 30 is opened. A game ball enters the opened first starting port 30, and the third special figure 1 reservation (third reservation) is generated, and the third reservation icon 9A is newly displayed. With the occurrence of special figure 1 suspension as a trigger, the suspension icon 9B corresponding to the first suspension is newly displayed among the three special figure 2 suspensions (first to third suspensions) that were not displayed.

FIG. 61(E) shows an effect in which a character image of "not yet" is displayed during the same variation after FIG. 61(D). This character image suggests that the number of displayed pending icons 9B will further increase. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), two pending icons 9B corresponding to the remaining two special figure 2 pending (second pending, third pending) that were not displayed are newly displayed, and a total of 3 A state in which two pending icons 9B are displayed. Here, the special figure 2 suspension that occurred after the start of the time saving is not displayed immediately after the suspension occurs, and when the special figure 1 suspension occurs, it is displayed until then according to the display of the suspension icon 9A. A delayed display performance is executed to collectively display the pending icons 9B that have not been displayed. When the pending icons 9B are collectively displayed, a plurality of pending icons 9B may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed one by one in order. When the icons are displayed one after another, the timing at which the first pending icon 9B is displayed and the timing at which the second pending icon 9B is displayed can be arbitrarily set.

FIG. 61(G) is executed instead of FIGS. 61(D) to (F) after FIG. 61(C). FIG. 61(G) is during special figure 1 variation following FIG. 61(C), and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed. A variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, there is also a display of the remaining number of times of time saving, which indicates the remaining number of times of time saving, indicated as "one time remaining", and a special figure currently fluctuating, indicated as "special figure 1 change". A special figure display during variation indicating the type and a time saving state final variation display indicating that it is the last variation of the time saving state represented as "last one time" are displayed. Here, the last variation of the time saving state is shown.

In FIG. 61(H), after FIG. 61(G), a state is shown in which a predetermined period has passed since the special figure 1 variation started. On the display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special figure 1 variation continues. When a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the suspension icon 9B corresponding to the first suspension is newly displayed among the three special figure 2 suspensions (1st to 3rd suspension) that were not displayed.

FIG. 61(I) shows an effect in which a character image of "not yet" is displayed during the same variation after FIG. 61(H). This character image suggests that the number of displayed pending icons 9B will further increase. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), two pending icons 9B corresponding to the remaining two special figure 2 pending (second pending, third pending) that were not displayed are newly displayed, and a total of 3 A state in which two pending icons 9B are displayed. Here, the hold icon 9B is not displayed for the special figure 2 hold that occurred before the predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the time saving final fluctuation after the start of the time saving final fluctuation, and the delay to be displayed collectively after the predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the time saving final fluctuation. A display effect is executed. When the reserved icons 9B are collectively displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period of time from the start of the time saving final variation, a plurality of reserved icons 9B may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed one by one in order. When the icons are displayed one after another, the timing at which the first pending icon 9B is displayed and the timing at which the second pending icon 9B is displayed can be arbitrarily set.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon delay display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20, an effect can be performed in which the pending icon 9A is displayed at a timing after the ball enters. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 60 and 61 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in this effect, as shown in FIGS. , a plurality of pending icons 9A are collectively displayed at a timing delayed from the ball entry. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 60 and 61 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in this effect, as shown in FIGS. ), after one of the plurality of pending icons 9A is displayed at a timing delayed from the ball entry, the remaining pending icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 59(L). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 60 and 61 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60(B) and (F), this effect is executed during the time saving state, and the game ball enters the second start port 21 before the final change of the time saving. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 60(K) and (L), the pending icon 9B is displayed during the final variation of the time saving. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 61 is also the same.

[Modification]
A modified example of the icon delay display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the icon delay display effects A to C, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B is exemplified as an icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole. However, the icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting hole may be an icon other than the pending icons 9A and 9B. In other words, any icon other than the holding icon may be used as long as it represents that the game ball has entered the starting hole. For example, in the present application, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, it always wins (FIG. 9(A)). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21, if an icon indicating that the hit is confirmed is displayed, this icon also indicates that the game ball of the present application has entered the starting hole. It corresponds to the icon.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole;
When a game ball enters the starting hole, it is possible to execute an effect in which the icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry of the ball,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
In the effect, when a plurality of game balls enter the starting hole, the plurality of icons are collectively displayed at a timing delayed from the entry of the balls.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
In the effect, when a plurality of game balls enter the starting hole, one of the plurality of icons is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry, and then the remaining reserved icons are displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
The effect is executed during the time saving state, and when the game ball enters the starting port before the final change of the time saving, the icon is displayed during the final change of the time saving.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The time reduction number of times notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. This time-saving frequency notification effect can be executed during a jackpot game during time-saving. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the jackpot game-related command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the time-saving number of times notification effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

[Time saving number of times notification production A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the reduction in working hours number of times notification effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the chance time entry effect is started. This chance time rush effect is executed in the ending effect during the jackpot game. The chance time rush effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, the display screen 7a displays a message image MSG saying "chance time rushes". It should be noted that the number of chance times (number of continuations) is either 100 times or 150 times in this embodiment. During the chance time, the variable performance is repeated for the number of times of the chance time unless a big win is achieved.

When a predetermined condition is met during repeated variable effects, a ready-to-win formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62(B). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "5" symbol. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate.

In the case of a big win, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the production pattern is stopped in a big win mode. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "5" symbols. An example of the jackpot mode is a mode in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at doubles. However, a special pattern other than the number pattern may be used to notify the big hit. For example, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are "5" patterns, and the middle production pattern 8C is a special pattern. Also, for example, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all special patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, the display screen 7a displays a message image MSG reading "big win". However, this jackpot notification effect can be omitted. The effect shown in FIG. 62(E) may be executed following the stop of the effect symbol in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 62(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), a chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is a effect suggesting that the chance time count (continuation count) is added, and an image suggesting the chance time count addition is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, an image of the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "add chance time" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(F) to (J), a charging effect is executed. The charge effect is a effect in which the meter image MTG and the numerical image SCG are displayed to inform the number of chance times (continuation number). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and a numeric image SCG is displayed above the meter image MSG. In this embodiment, the number of game balls acquired is not notified. By not announcing the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the charging effect.

In FIG. 62(F), the numerical image SCG is "0". Further, the meter image MTG is also displayed blank in accordance with the numerical image SCG. Note that in the present embodiment, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG are "0" at the start of the charging effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the charging effect, the number image SCG and the meter image MTG may be the remaining number of chance times at the time of the big win.

In FIG. 62(G), the numerical image SCG is "10". Moreover, the meter image MTG also increases according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. An increase in the meter image MTG is indicated by hatching (the same applies below). Note that the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG do not have to be completely synchronized (matched). For example, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be changed continuously, and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be changed stepwise. Also, the opposite may be true. The same applies to the following.

In FIG. 62(H), the numerical image SCG is "26". Further, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG.
In FIG. 62(I), the numerical image SCG is "55". Further, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG.
In FIG. 62(J), the numerical image SCG is "100". Moreover, the meter image MTG is also in a state where the whole is hatched.

It should be noted that the charge effect is executed in the round game during the jackpot game. Therefore, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be increased in accordance with the winning of the special winning opening 30 . In addition, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased according to the winning of the big winning slot 30 . In a plurality of round games, the increase rate of the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased as the round game progresses. For example, in the case of a 3R round game, the increase ratio is set to "2" for the 1st round, "3" for the 2nd round, and "5" for the 3rd round. According to this configuration, the rate of increase is small in the beginning and the rate of increase is large in the end, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(K), a result effect is executed. The result effect is a effect for notifying the number of chance times (the number of continuations). This result production is executed by analyzing the ending command of the jackpot received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a message image MSG saying "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Also, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(L), a continuous notification effect is executed. The continuation notification effect is an effect for notifying that the chance time will continue. The continuous notification effect is executed by analyzing the ending command of the jackpot received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a message image MSG of "Continue Chance Time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Time saving number of times notification production B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the number of times of working hours notification effect B. FIG. Time saving number of times information production B is another example of time saving number of times information production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the chance time entry effect is started. This chance time rush effect is executed in the ending effect during the jackpot game. The chance time entry effect is executed by analyzing the ending command of the jackpot received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. - 特許庁In this case, a message image MSG saying "chance time entering" is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the number of chance times (continuation number) is either 100 times or 150 times in this embodiment. During the chance time, the variable performance is repeated for the number of times of the chance time unless a big win is achieved.

When a predetermined condition is met during repeated variable effects, a ready-to-win formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 63(B). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "5" symbol. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate.

In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the production pattern is stopped in a big win mode. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "5" symbols. An example of the jackpot mode is a mode in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at doubles. However, a special pattern other than the number pattern may be used to notify the big hit. For example, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are "5" patterns, and the middle production pattern 8C is a special pattern. Also, for example, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all special patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, the display screen 7a displays a message image MSG reading "big win". However, this jackpot notification effect can be omitted. The effect shown in FIG. 63(E) may be executed following the stop of the effect symbol in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 63(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), a chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is a effect suggesting that the chance time count (continuation count) is added, and an image suggesting the chance time count addition is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, an image of the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "add chance time" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(F) to (J), a charging effect is executed. The charge effect is a effect in which the meter image MTG and the numerical image SCG are displayed to inform the number of chance times (continuation number). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and a numeric image SCG is displayed above the meter image MSG. In this embodiment, the number of game balls acquired is not notified. By not announcing the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the charging effect.

In FIG. 63(F), the numerical image SCG is "0". Further, the meter image MTG is also displayed blank in accordance with the numerical image SCG. Note that in the present embodiment, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG are "0" at the start of the charging effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the charging effect, the number image SCG and the meter image MTG may be the remaining number of chance times at the time of the big win.

In FIG. 63(G), the numerical image SCG is "10". Moreover, the meter image MTG also increases according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. An increase in the meter image MTG is indicated by hatching (the same applies below). Note that the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG do not have to be completely synchronized (matched). For example, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be changed continuously, and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be changed stepwise. Also, the opposite may be true. The same applies to the following.

In FIG. 63(H), the numerical image SCG is "26". Further, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. Furthermore, here, the meter image MTG is enlarged more than the meter images MTG of FIGS. 63(F) and (G).
In FIG. 63(I), the numerical image SCG is "55". Further, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. Furthermore, here, the meter image MTG is enlarged more than the meter image MTG of FIG. 63(H).
In FIG. 63(J), the numerical image SCG is "100". Moreover, the meter image MTG is also in a state where the whole is hatched. The meter image MTG remains enlarged and has the same size as in FIG. 63(I).

It should be noted that the charge effect is executed during the round game during the jackpot game. Therefore, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be increased in accordance with the winning of the big winning openings 30 and 35 . Also, the hatched portions of the meter image MTG may be increased in accordance with the winning of the big winning openings 30 and 35 . In a plurality of round games, the increase rate of the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased as the round game progresses. For example, in the case of a 3R round game, the increase ratio is set to "2" for the 1st round, "3" for the 2nd round, and "5" for the 3rd round. According to this configuration, the rate of increase is small in the beginning and the rate of increase is large in the end, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

In the present embodiment, the meter image MTG is enlarged and displayed in the charging effect. This enlarged display of the meter image MTG gradually enlarges the meter image MTG. At this time, the meter image MTG may be enlarged as the round game progresses. For example, in the case of a 3R round game, the meter image MTG displayed in the 1R is enlarged twice in the 2R and 3R. On the other hand, the enlarged display of the meter image MTG may be one in which the meter image MTG is continuously enlarged. According to these configurations, the meter image MTG is small at the beginning and becomes large at the end, which contributes to the enhancement of interest. Also, separately from the meter image MTG, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(K), a result effect is executed. The result effect is a effect for notifying the number of chance times (the number of continuations). This result production is executed by analyzing the ending command of the jackpot received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a message image MSG saying "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Also, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(L), a continuous notification effect is executed. The continuation notification effect is an effect for notifying that the chance time will continue. The continuous notification effect is executed by analyzing the ending command of the jackpot received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a message image MSG of "Continue Chance Time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Time saving number of times notification production C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the reduction in working hours number of times notification effect C. As shown in FIG. Time-saving frequency notification effect C is an example when the number of times of chance time (number of times of continuation) reaches 150 times.
First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the chance time entry effect is started. This chance time rush effect is executed in the ending effect during the jackpot game. The chance time rush effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . In this case, a message image MSG saying "chance time entering" is displayed on the display screen 7a. During the chance time, the variable performance is repeated for the number of times of the chance time unless a big win is achieved.

When a predetermined condition is met during repeated variable effects, a ready-to-win formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 64(B). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "5" symbol. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate.

In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 64(C), the production pattern is stopped in a big win mode. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "5" symbols. An example of the jackpot mode is a mode in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at doubles. However, a special pattern other than the number pattern may be used to notify the big hit. For example, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are "5" patterns, and the middle production pattern 8C is a special pattern. Also, for example, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all special patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, the display screen 7a displays a message image MSG reading "big win". However, this jackpot notification effect can be omitted. The effect shown in FIG. 64(E) may be executed following the stop of the effect symbol in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 64(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is a effect suggesting that the chance time count (continuation count) is added, and an image suggesting the chance time count addition is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, an image of the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "add chance time" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a charging effect is executed. The charge effect is a effect in which the meter image MTG and the numerical image SCG are displayed to inform the number of chance times (continuation number). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command or ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and a numeric image SCG is displayed above the meter image MSG. The numerical image SCG is "100". Moreover, the meter image MTG is also in a state where the whole is hatched. In addition, a message image MSG reading "Right shot" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, the number of game balls acquired is not notified. By not announcing the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the charging effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a meter image enlarging effect is executed. The meter image enlarging effect is a effect of enlarging and displaying the meter image MTG displayed in FIG. 64(F). The meter image enlarging effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, both ends of the meter image MTG are enlarged and displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. Note that the numerical image SCG is displayed without being enlarged. Of course, like the meter image MTG, the numerical image SCG may also be enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a result effect is executed. The result effect is a effect for notifying the number of chance times (the number of continuations). This result production is executed by analyzing the ending command of the jackpot received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a message image MSG saying "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Also, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a meter image MTG and a numerical image SCG are displayed above the message image MSG. Here, an image reduction moving effect is executed in which the meter image MTG enlarged and displayed in FIG. 64(G) is moved to the upper right portion of the display screen 7a while being reduced. The numerical image SCG is also moved together with the meter image MTG by this image reduction movement effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(I), a continuous notification effect is executed. The continuation notification effect is an effect for notifying that the chance time will continue. The continuous notification effect is executed by analyzing the ending command of the jackpot received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 . Here, a message image MSG of "Continue Chance Time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(J), a variable effect is executed. The variable performance is a performance in which the performance pattern changes and stops. During the chance time, the variable performance is repeated for the number of times of the chance time unless a big win is achieved. Here, it is assumed that 100 times of variation effects have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(K), an end notification effect is executed. The end notification effect is a effect for notifying that the chance time has ended. The end notification effect is executed as a change effect for the 100th chance time. Here, a message image MSG saying "chance time is over" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. If the number of times of chance time (continuation number) is 100 times, chance time ends here. On the other hand, when the number of times of chance time (number of times of continuation) is 150, the additional effect of FIG. 64(L) is executed.

In FIG. 64(L), an additional effect is executed. The additional effect is a effect for notifying that the number of times of chance time (the number of times of continuation) is added. The additional effect is executed as a final variation effect of the chance time. Here, a message image MSG of "chance time +50" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, when the number of times of chance time (continuous number of times) is 150 times, an addition of 50 times is reported in the 100th chance time change effect.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the time-saving number of times notification effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the number of chance times after the jackpot game during the jackpot game (FIGS. 62(F) to (K), FIGS. 63(F) to (K), FIGS. 64(F)-(H)). According to this configuration, since the number of chance times after the big winning game is notified during the big winning game, the player becomes conscious of the continuation of the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot game during the chance time, a notification effect for notifying the number of chance times after the jackpot game is executed (FIGS. 62(A) to (K), FIGS. 63(A) to (K), FIGS. 64(A) to (K)). According to this configuration, the player will be more conscious of the continuation of the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a chance time addition effect is executed to display an image suggesting an increase in the number of chance times (FIGS. 62(E), 63(E), and 64(E)). According to this configuration, the player will be more conscious of the continuation of the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of chance times is counted up and displayed as the numerical image SCG (FIGS. 62(F) to (J), FIGS. 63(F) to (J)). According to this configuration, the player will be more conscious of the continuation of the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the increase in the number of chance times is displayed using the meter image MTG (Figs. 62(F) to (J), Figs. 63(F) to (J), Fig. 64(F) ~ (H)). According to this configuration, the player will be more conscious of the continuation of the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment displays an image suggesting that the chance time will continue (Fig. 62(L), Fig. 63(L), Fig. 64(I)). According to this configuration, the player will be more conscious of the continuation of the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game is not displayed (Figs. 62(F) to (J), Figs. 63(F) to (J), Fig. 64 ( F)). According to this configuration, the player will be more conscious of the continuation of the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the chance time addition production (FIGS. 62(E), 63(E), 64(E)), charge production (FIGS. 62(F) to (J), FIGS. 63(F) to (J), FIG. 64 (F)), meter image enlargement effect (Fig. 64 (G)), result effect (Fig. 62 (K), Fig. 63 (K), Fig. 64 (H)), continuous notification effect (Fig. 62 (L), Figures 63(L) and 64(I) correspond to the "notification effect". Also, the chance time (time saving state) corresponds to the "advantageous game state", the jackpot game corresponds to the "special game", and the number of chance times corresponds to the "continuation number".

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the number-of-hours-savings information production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the number of chance times (continuation number) is reported. That is, the number of times of continuation of the time-saving gaming state (low probability high base state) was reported. On the other hand, the number of times of continuation of the probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state) may be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the notification effect is performed in the jackpot game during the chance time. On the other hand, in the jackpot game in the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) or the jackpot game in the normal game state (low probability low base state), the notification effect may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the meter image enlargement effect and the image reduction movement effect are executed in which the meter image MTG is enlarged and then reduced and moved (FIGS. 64(G) and (H)). On the other hand, not only the meter image MTG but also an effect such as enlarging, reducing, and moving a notification image that notifies the number of chance times may be performed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine that executes a special game when a predetermined lottery is won, and shifts to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player with the special game as a trigger,
In the middle of the special game, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the number of times of continuation, which is the number of times the advantageous game state continues,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
The notification effect is executed when the predetermined lottery is won in the advantageous game state and the special game is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the notification effect, an image is displayed that suggests adding the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the notification effect, the numerical value is counted up and displayed until the number of continuations is reached.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
In the notification effect, an increase in the numerical value until the number of continuations is reached is displayed using a meter image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-5,
In the notification effect, an image is displayed that suggests that the advantageous gaming state will be continued.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
In the notification effect, the number of acquired balls in the special game is not displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-7,
The number of continuations includes a first number of continuations and a second number of continuations greater than the first number of continuations,
In the notification effect, the effect is performed using the first number of continuations,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-9]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
The display of the count-up in the notification effect is performed in parallel with the entry of the game ball into a specific ball entrance in the special game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-10]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5,
The display of the meter image in the notification effect is performed in parallel with the entry of the game ball into a specific ball entrance in the special game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol irregular start/stop effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. These decorative symbol irregular start/stop effects A to C are executed during special symbol variation effects. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 to display an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect A is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a decorative symbol start pre-start effect is performed. In this effect before starting the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is arranged slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative design 8L is a "1" design, the middle decorative design 8C is a "3" design, and the right decorative design 8R is a "4" design. Also, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this decorative design fluctuation start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 start to fluctuate. Specifically, among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R, first, the left decorative design 8L starts to fluctuate, then the middle decorative design 8C starts to fluctuate, and then the right decorative design 8R starts to fluctuate. do. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R each move in the lower left direction (arrow direction in the figure) of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the character CRA continues the predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), decorative symbol variation effect 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are produced to fluctuate (move) from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen 7a, is a line sloping to the right, and is not parallel to the first line LN1. Note that the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), decorative pattern variation effect 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 2, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R reach the second line LN2, the reached decorative patterns are gradually erased from the portion where they reach the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative design 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the middle decorative design 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative design 8R reaches the second line LN2. . It should be noted that the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined presentation while changing places or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), decorative symbol variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect 3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R erased on the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the third line LN3. . The third line LN3 is arranged at the lower right position of the display screen 7a, is a line that descends to the left, and is not parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 gradually appear from the third line LN3 toward the upper left of the display screen 7a, and fluctuate (move) toward the upper left of the display screen 7a. do. The left decorative design 8L appearing from the third line LN3 is a "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is a "4" design, and the right decorative design 8R is a "5" design. It's becoming That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are different number patterns from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. However, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may be the same number patterns as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have been erased after reaching the second line LN2. . Also, the character CRA continues the predetermined presentation while changing places or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(F), decorative symbol variation effect 4 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 4, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are respectively moved onto the first line LN1 and displayed stationary. Specifically, first, the left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed. , and is stopped and displayed, and the right decorative pattern 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect B is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a decorative symbol start pre-start effect is performed. In this effect before starting the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is arranged slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative design 8L is a "1" design, the middle decorative design 8C is a "3" design, and the right decorative design 8R is a "4" design. Also, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this decorative design fluctuation start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 start to fluctuate. Specifically, among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R, first, the left decorative design 8L starts to fluctuate, then the middle decorative design 8C starts to fluctuate, and then the right decorative design 8R starts to fluctuate. do. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each move downward (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) on the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the character CRA continues the predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), decorative symbol variation effect 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are produced to fluctuate (move) from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is arranged below the first line LN1 and parallel to the first line LN1. Note that the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), decorative pattern variation effect 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 2, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R reach the second line LN2, the reached decorative patterns are gradually erased from the portion where they reach the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative design 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the middle decorative design 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative design 8R reaches the second line LN2. . It should be noted that the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined presentation while changing places or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), decorative symbol variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect 3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R erased on the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the third line LN3. . The third line LN3 is arranged above the first line LN1 and parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. In other words, the first line LN1 is arranged between the third line LN3 and the second line LN2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 gradually appear downward from the third line LN3 on the display screen 7a, and fluctuate (move) downward on the display screen 7a. do. The left decorative design 8L appearing from the third line LN3 is a "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is a "4" design, and the right decorative design 8R is a "5" design. It's becoming That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are different number patterns from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. However, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may be the same number patterns as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have been erased after reaching the second line LN2. . Also, the character CRA continues the predetermined presentation while changing places or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), decorative symbol variation effect 4 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 4, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are respectively moved onto the first line LN1 and displayed stationary. Specifically, first, the left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed. , and is stopped and displayed, and the right decorative pattern 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect C is an effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative symbol start pre-start effect is performed. In this effect before starting the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is arranged slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative design 8L is a "1" design, the middle decorative design 8C is a "3" design, and the right decorative design 8R is a "4" design. Also, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this decorative design fluctuation start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 start to fluctuate. Specifically, among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R, first, the left decorative design 8L starts to fluctuate, then the middle decorative design 8C starts to fluctuate, and then the right decorative design 8R starts to fluctuate. do. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each move downward (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) on the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the character CRA continues the predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), decorative symbol variation effect 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are produced to fluctuate (move) from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is arranged below the first line LN1 and parallel to the first line LN1. Note that the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), decorative symbol variation effect 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 2, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R reach the second line LN2, the reached decorative patterns are gradually erased from the portion where they reach the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative design 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the middle decorative design 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative design 8R reaches the second line LN2. . It should be noted that the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined presentation while changing places or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), decorative symbol variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect 3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R erased on the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the third line LN3. . The third line LN3 is arranged above the first line LN1 and parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. In other words, the first line LN1 is arranged between the third line LN3 and the second line LN2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 gradually appear downward from the third line LN3 on the display screen 7a, and fluctuate (move) downward on the display screen 7a. do. The left decorative design 8L appearing from the third line LN3 is a "2" design, the middle decorative design 8C is a "4" design, and the right decorative design 8R is a "5" design. It's becoming That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are different number patterns from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. However, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may be the same number patterns as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have been erased after reaching the second line LN2. . Also, the character CRA continues the predetermined presentation while changing places or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), decorative symbol variation effect 4 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance 4, the left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1, is stopped and displayed on the first line LN1, and the lower part of the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern 8L is hidden. A swirl image UZ is displayed as follows. The spiral image UZ is an image that rotates like a spiral. When the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the first line LN1 and the swirl image UZ is displayed, a bounding sound that is a bouncing sound is notified from the speaker. When the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the first line LN1, the swirling image UZ is displayed so as to hide the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the bounce sound is notified, thereby allowing the player to see the left decorative pattern 8L. reaches the first line LN1, it feels like the left decorative pattern 8L is bound by the first line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), decorative symbol variation effect 5 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production 5, the middle decorative pattern 8C appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1, is stopped and displayed on the first line LN1, and the lower part of the stopped and displayed middle decorative pattern 8C is hidden. The swirling image UZ is displayed as shown, and further, the right decorative pattern 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1, is stopped on the first line LN1, and is displayed below the stopped right decorative pattern 8R. A spiral image UZ is displayed so as to hide the part. The spiral image UZ is an image that rotates like a spiral. When the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the first line LN1 and the swirl image UZ is displayed, a bounding sound, such as a bouncing sound, is notified from the speaker. When the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the first line LN1, the swirl image UZ is displayed so as to hide the lower part of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the bounce sound is notified, so that the player can see the middle decorative pattern 8C. When reaching the first line LN1, it feels like the middle decorative pattern 8C is bound by the first line LN1. Also, when the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the first line LN1 and the swirl image UZ is displayed, a bounding sound, which is a sound like a bounce, is notified from the speaker. When the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the first line LN1, the swirl image UZ is displayed so as to hide the lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the bounce sound is notified, so that the player can see the right decorative pattern 8R. When reaching the first line LN1, it feels like the right decorative pattern 8R is bound by the first line LN1. At this time, the spiral image UZ of the left decorative pattern 8L disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), decorative pattern variation effect 6 is performed. In this decorative design variation effect 6, the swirling images UZ of the decorative designs 8C and 8R disappear, and the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are respectively moved onto the first line LN1 and displayed stationary.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol variation effects 4 and 5 of the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect C, the lower portions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were hidden by the spiral image UZ, but the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are visible to the player. It is sufficient if the areas of 8C and 8R are changed, and an image such as a character can be substituted for the swirl image UZ. , left part, etc. may be hidden.

In the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 move toward the first line LN1. It may also be possible to move toward a fourth line LN4 different from the line LN2 and stop and display on the fourth line LN4.

In the decorative design irregular start/stop performance, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2, the left decorative design 8L moves first, and then the middle decorative design. 8C moves, then the right decorative pattern 8R moves, and the left decorative pattern 8L first reaches the second line LN2, then the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then Although the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the second line LN2, the present invention is not limited to this. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may simultaneously move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2 The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be configured to reach the second line LN2 at the same time. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may or may not disappear at the same time after reaching the second line LN2.

In the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear on the third line LN3 and move to the first line LN1, the left decorative pattern 8L appears first, and then the middle decorative pattern appears. 8C appears, then the right decorative pattern 8R appears, and the left decorative pattern 8L first reaches the first line LN1, then the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the first line LN1, and then In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the first line LN1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , 8R may reach the first line LN1 at the same time.

In the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R reaching the second line LN2 are gradually erased. , gradually appearing from the third line LN3, moving to the first line LN1, and being stopped for display. For example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 to the third line LN3, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that reach the third line LN3 are gradually erased and removed from the second line LN2. It may appear gradually, move to the first line LN1, and be stopped. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move from the second line LN2 to the third line LN3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R reaching the third line LN3 are gradually erased, and gradually removed from the first line LN1. It may appear, move to the second line LN2, and be stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move from the second line LN2 to the first line LN1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R reaching the first line LN1 are gradually erased, and gradually removed from the third line LN3. It may appear, move to the second line LN2, and be stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move from the third line LN3 to the first line LN1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R reaching the first line LN1 are gradually erased, and gradually removed from the second line LN2. It may appear, move to the third line LN3, and be stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move from the third line LN3 to the second line LN2, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 are gradually erased and gradually removed from the first line LN1. It may appear, move to the third line LN3, and be stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
In the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed on the first line LN1, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are directed from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. After that, a display effect is performed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the third line LN3. According to this configuration, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 move toward the first line LN1. According to this configuration, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R suddenly appear from the third line LN3 and move toward the first line LN1, which is the variation start position. It is possible to impart unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effects B and C of the above embodiment, the first line LN1 is arranged between the second line LN2 and the third line LN3. According to this configuration, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in the direction from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the third line LN3, and further , when moving toward the first line LN1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in a direction substantially perpendicular to each line LN, so that the player can easily recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. This makes it easier for the player to feel the unexpectedness of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effects B and C of the above embodiment, the third line LN3 is arranged above the first line LN1, and the second line LN2 is arranged below the first line LN1. According to this configuration, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R move in the direction from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the third line LN3, and further , when moving toward the first line LN1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R change substantially linearly, so that the player can easily recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, It is possible to make it easier for the player to feel the unexpectedness of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the direction from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that reach the line LN2 and reach the second line LN2 disappear from the part that reaches the second line LN2. According to this configuration, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R disappear on the second line LN2 and appear on the third line LN3, so that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be expressed as if they were warped, and the game is played. Therefore, it is possible to strongly give the unexpectedness of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to the person. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the first line,
The second display effect is a display effect in which the decorative pattern changes in a predetermined direction, which is a direction from the first line to a second line different from the first line,
The third display effect is a display effect in which the decorative pattern appears from a third line different from the first line and the second line,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the decorative pattern appearing from the third line fluctuates toward the first line.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
the first line is positioned between the second line and the third line;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
The third line is arranged above the first line, and the second line is arranged below the first line,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the second display effect of the combination effect, when the decorative pattern moving in the predetermined direction reaches the second line, it disappears from the reached part.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The scroll background effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. FIG. This scroll background effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the scroll background effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image display apparatus An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Scroll background effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the scroll background effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "9" symbol. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that informs of the development from the normal reach effect to the SP reach effect. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are reduced and moved to the upper left and upper right portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), a background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect of displaying a dedicated background image on the display screen 7a. Here, the background image SG (hatched) is displayed. The background image SG is displayed behind the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R. In other words, it is partially covered with the "9" symbols, which are the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the near side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 68(E) to (K), a scroll display effect is executed. In the scroll display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the intermediate effect symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The displayed medium effect pattern 8C is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG. Then, the middle effect pattern 8C is framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the background image SG, the medium effect patterns 8C are displayed in the order of "1" pattern, "2" pattern, "3" pattern, "4" pattern, and so on. As a result, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is realized with the scroll display of the background image SG. Even if the background image SG is scrolled, the "9" symbol, which is the ready-to-win symbol, is not affected by the scrolling and does not change its position from the predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 68(E), the "1" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper left position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The "1" pattern is displayed on the front side of the background image SG. As a result, part of the background image SG is covered with the "1" pattern. The same applies to other patterns below.

In FIG. 68(F), the "1" pattern is scrolled to the lower left of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. In addition, the "2" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper right position of the scroll-displayed background image SG.

In FIG. 68(G), the background image SG and the "2" pattern are scrolled to the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Also, the "3" pattern and the "4" pattern, which are the medium effect patterns 8C, are displayed continuously. The "3" symbol is displayed to the left of the "2" symbol. Also, the "4" symbol is displayed at the upper center position.

In FIG. 68(H), after the "2" pattern and "3" pattern scroll-displayed together with the background image SG are out of the display screen 7a, the "4" pattern is framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. showing.

In FIG. 68(I), the character image CRA is displayed at the upper left position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The character image CRA is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG, similarly to the middle effect symbol 8C. The character image CRA is displayed in front of the background image SG and covers part of the background image SG.

In FIG. 68(J), the character image CRA is scrolled to the bottom of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. In addition, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern, which are the medium effect patterns 8C, are continuously displayed. The "5" pattern is displayed in a substantially central position of the background image SG so as to overlap the character image CRA. The "5" pattern is displayed in front of the character image CRA and the background image SG, and partially covers the character image CRA and the background image SG. The "6" pattern is displayed at the upper left position of the background image SG.

In FIG. 68(K), the character image CRA, the "5" pattern, and the "6" pattern are scrolled to the bottom of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Here, the character image CRA and the "5" pattern are shown framed out from the lower portion of the display screen 7a.

When the scroll display effect ends, next, as shown in FIG. 68(L), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C moves at a relatively low speed. Here, the medium effect symbol 8C is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Scroll background effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the scroll background effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "9" symbol. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that informs of the development from the normal reach effect to the SP reach effect. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are reduced and moved to the upper left and upper right portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect of displaying a dedicated background image on the display screen 7a. Here, the background image SG (hatched) is displayed. The background image SG is displayed behind the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R. In other words, it is partially covered with the "9" symbols, which are the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the near side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(E) to (K), a scroll display effect is executed. In the scroll display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the intermediate effect symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The displayed medium effect pattern 8C is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG. Then, the middle effect pattern 8C is framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the background image SG, the medium effect patterns 8C are displayed in the order of "1" pattern, "2" pattern, "3" pattern, "4" pattern, and so on. As a result, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is realized with the scroll display of the background image SG. Even if the background image SG is scrolled, the "9" symbol, which is the ready-to-win symbol, is not affected by the scrolling and does not change its position from the predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 69(E), the "1" symbol, which is the intermediate effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper left position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The "1" pattern is displayed on the front side of the background image SG. As a result, part of the background image SG is covered with the "1" pattern. The same applies to other patterns below. In addition, the "1" symbol is rotated about the vertical axis J1 during the scroll display. This makes it easy to distinguish from the background image SG and makes the "1" pattern stand out.

In FIG. 69(F), the "1" pattern is scrolled to the lower left of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. In addition, the "2" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is scroll-displayed and framed from above the display screen 7a. The "2" symbol is rotated about the vertical axis J2 as the axis of rotation during the scroll display. This makes it easy to distinguish from the background image SG and makes the "2" pattern stand out.

In FIG. 69(G), the "2" pattern is scrolled to the lower right part of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Also, the "3" pattern and the "4" pattern, which are the medium effect patterns 8C, are displayed continuously. The "3" symbol is displayed to the left of the "2" symbol. Also, the "4" pattern is framed in from above the display screen 7a. The "3" pattern and the "4" pattern are also rotated about the vertical axes J3 and J4 during the scroll display. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish from the background image SG, and the "3" pattern and the "4" pattern stand out.

FIG. 69(H) shows how the "2" pattern and "3" pattern scrolled together with the background image SG frame out of the display screen 7a, and then the "4" pattern frames out from below the display screen 7a. showing.

In FIG. 69(I), the character image CRA is displayed at the upper left position of the scrolled background image SG. The character image CRA is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG, similarly to the middle effect symbol 8C. The character image CRA is displayed in front of the background image SG and covers part of the background image SG.

In FIG. 69(J), the character image CRA is scrolled to the bottom of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. In addition, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern, which are the medium effect patterns 8C, are continuously displayed. The "5" pattern is displayed in a substantially central position of the background image SG so as to overlap the character image CRA. The "5" pattern is displayed in front of the character image CRA and the background image SG, and partially covers the character image CRA and the background image SG. The "6" pattern is displayed at the upper left position of the background image SG. The "5" pattern and the "6" pattern are also rotated about the vertical axes J5 and J6 during the scroll display. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish from the background image SG, and the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern stand out.

In FIG. 69(K), the character image CRA, the "5" pattern, and the "6" pattern are scrolled to the bottom of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. Here, the character image CRA and the "5" pattern are shown framed out from the lower portion of the display screen 7a.

When the scroll display effect is finished, next, as shown in FIG. 69(L), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C moves at a relatively low speed. Here, the medium effect symbol 8C is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Scroll background effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the scroll background effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "9" symbol. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that informs of the development from the normal reach effect to the SP reach effect. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are reduced and moved to the upper left and upper right portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect of displaying a dedicated background image on the display screen 7a. Here, the background image SG (hatched) is displayed. The background image SG is displayed behind the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R. In other words, it is partially covered with the "9" symbols, which are the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the near side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(E) to (J), a scroll display effect is executed. In the scroll display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the intermediate effect symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The displayed medium effect pattern 8C is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG. Then, the middle effect pattern 8C is framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the background image SG, the medium effect patterns 8C are displayed in the order of "1" pattern, "2" pattern, "3" pattern, "4" pattern, and so on. As a result, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is realized with the scroll display of the background image SG. Even if the background image SG is scrolled, the "9" symbol, which is the ready-to-win symbol, is not affected by the scrolling and does not change its position from the predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 70(E), the "1" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper left position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The "1" pattern is displayed on the front side of the background image SG. As a result, part of the background image SG is covered with the "1" pattern. The same applies to other patterns below.

In FIG. 70(F), the "1" pattern is scrolled to the lower left of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. In addition, the "2" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper right position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The "2" symbol is displayed overlapping the "9" symbol, which is the right effect symbol 8R, and is displayed on the back side of the "9" symbol. That is, the ready-to-win symbol "9" is displayed in the foreground. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ready-to-win pattern. This display order is the same for other symbols in relation to the ready-to-win symbols.

In FIG. 70(G), the background image SG and the "2" pattern are scrolled to the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Also, the "3" pattern and the "4" pattern, which are the medium effect patterns 8C, are displayed continuously. The "3" symbol is displayed to the left of the "2" symbol. Also, the "4" symbol is displayed at the upper center position.

FIG. 70(H) shows how the "2" pattern and "3" pattern scrolled together with the background image SG frame out of the display screen 7a, and then the "4" pattern frames out from below the display screen 7a. showing.

In FIG. 70(I), the character image CRA is displayed at the upper left position of the scroll-displayed background image SG. The character image CRA is displayed overlapping the "9" symbol, which is the left effect symbol 8L. Furthermore, the "5" pattern, which is the medium effect pattern 8C, is displayed overlapping the character image SG and the "9" pattern. At this time, the "9" symbol, which is the ready-to-win symbol, is displayed in the foreground, the "5" symbol is displayed behind the "9" symbol, the character image CRA is displayed behind the "5" symbol, and the character A background image SG is displayed behind the image CRA. As a result, the player can most easily recognize the ready-to-win symbol, and then easily recognize the "5" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C. This display order is the same for other symbols in relation to the ready-to-win symbols and character images.

In FIG. 70(J), the character image CRA and the "5" pattern are scrolled to the bottom of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. In addition, the "6" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed. The "6" pattern is displayed at the upper left position of the background image SG.

In FIG. 70(K), the scroll display rendering ends, the background image SG changes its scroll direction, is scrolled leftward as indicated by the arrow YG, and is framed out from the left side of the display screen 7a. By changing the scroll direction of the background image SG and out of the frame, it becomes easy to understand the end of the scroll display effect, and the player can be surprised. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed in the vertical direction at the center of the ready-to-win pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(L), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C moves at a relatively low speed. Here, the medium effect symbol 8C is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the scrolling background effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the background image SG displayed on the back side of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is scrolled, and the scrolled background image SG is displayed. (Fig. 68(E)-(K), Fig. 69(E)-(K), Fig. 70(E)-(J)). According to this configuration, the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes a novel performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved. The background image SG corresponds to the "background image", the predetermined position where the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed corresponds to the "specific position", and the scrolling background effect corresponds to the "scrolling variation effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the intermediate effect symbol 8C displayed at a predetermined position of the background image SG is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG (FIGS. 68(E)-(K), FIGS. 69(E)- (K), FIGS. 70(E)-(J)). According to this configuration, the movement of the medium effect pattern 8C becomes novel, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG and framed out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68(H)(K), 69(H)(K), FIG. 70(H)). According to this configuration, the manner in which the middle effect symbol 8C disappears becomes novel, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the background image SG, it may be displayed within the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68 (E) to (G) (J), FIGS. 69 (E) (G ) (J), FIGS. 70 (E) to (G) (I) (J)), frame-in may be performed from the outside of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 69 (F) (G)).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined manner to form a ready-to-win pattern (FIGS. 68(B), 69(B), and 70). After (B)), it is executed targeting medium effect symbols 8C other than ready-to-win symbols. According to this configuration, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C directly linked to the big win becomes novel, and the interest in the game can be improved. The left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, ie, the “9” symbol, correspond to the “ready-to-reach symbol”, and the middle performance symbol 8C corresponds to the “final stop symbol”.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the ready-to-win symbol “9” is displayed in front of the background image SG, covers part of the background image SG, and is displayed even if the background image SG is scroll-displayed. The position is not changed from the predetermined position on the screen 7a (Figs. 68(E) to (K), Figs. 69(E) to (K), Figs. 70(E) to (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the ready-to-win symbols and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed closer to the front side than the background image SG, and is displayed further back than the ready-to-win symbol "9" (FIG. 70(F) (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the ready-to-win symbol in relation to the middle effect symbol 8C, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed at a specific position of the background image SG while being rotated around the vertical axis of the medium effect pattern 8C (Fig. 69 (E) to (H ) (J) (K)). According to this configuration, the medium effect pattern 8C scroll-displayed together with the background image SG stands out, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the scrolling background effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG and is framed out of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, an effect (symbol elimination effect) may be performed such that the medium effect symbol 8C is erased within the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the disappearing medium effect symbol 8C stands out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the background image SG is scrolled downward. In this regard, the scroll direction of the background image SG is not particularly limited. For example, the configuration may be such that the display is scrolled upward, leftward, rightward, or obliquely. Also, the scroll direction may be changed during the scroll display effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the character image CRA is displayed within the display screen 7a, and then scroll-displayed together with the background image SG. On the other hand, the character image CRA may be scroll-displayed from the outside of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG to be framed in the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, after the ready-to-win formation effect, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol other than the ready-to-win symbols, is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG. On the other hand, at least one of the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R, and the middle effect pattern 8C may be scroll-displayed together with the background image SG before the reach formation effect. For example, after the left effect symbol 8L is stopped, the right effect symbol 8R is scroll-displayed together with the background image SG to perform the ready-to-win effect.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment, when rotating and displaying the medium effect pattern 8C, the vertical axis of the medium effect pattern 8C is used as the rotation axis. On the other hand, any axis may be used as the axis for rotating the middle effect symbol 8C. For example, it may be a horizontal axis or an oblique axis. Further, the axes J1 to J6 for rotating the medium effect pattern 8C are at an angle to each other. On the other hand, the axes for rotating the medium effect symbols 8C may be arranged in the same direction. Furthermore, the timing of rotating the medium effect pattern 8C is not particularly limited. The scrolling display may be rotated continuously, intermittently, or rotated only once upon initial display.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine,
In the variable display of performance symbols, a scrolling variation performance can be executed in which a background image displayed on the back side of the performance symbols is scrolled and the performance symbols are displayed at a specific position of the scroll-displayed background image. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect symbol displayed at the specific position of the background image is scroll-displayed together with the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect pattern is scroll-displayed together with the background image and framed out of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
The scroll variation effect is executed for the final stop pattern other than the ready-to-win pattern after the ready-to-win formation effect in which a part of the effect pattern stops in a predetermined manner to form the ready-to-win pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the scroll variation effect, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed on the front side of the background image, covers part of the background image, and changes its position from a predetermined position on the display screen even when the background image is scroll-displayed. do not have,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or aspect B2-5,
In the scroll variation effect, the final stop pattern is displayed on the front side of the background image and is displayed on the back side of the ready-to-win pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-6,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect pattern is displayed at the specific position of the background image by rotating around the vertical axis of the effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-7,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect pattern is scroll-displayed together with the background image and framed in from the outside of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-4 to B2-8,
In the scroll variation effect, a special image displayed on the front side of the background image and on the back side of the effect pattern can be displayed, and the special image is displayed by scrolling together with the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-10]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-9,
The special image is displayed on the back side of the ready-to-win pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The image superimposition button effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. The image superimposition button effects A to C are executed during special symbol variation effects. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an image superimposition button effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a.

[Image superimposition button effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition button effect A. FIG. The image superimposition button effect A is a effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a character image display effect is performed. This character image display effect is performed during the ready-to-win state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a character image XB11 and a chance up image XB12. Each action image XB1 has the same outline shape. The character image XB11 is composed of a yellow "E" character. The chance-up image XB12 is composed of characters "chance" suggesting expectations for a big win in a rectangular frame. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a so as not to contact each other. In addition, in this character image display effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are formed with the same number pattern "7" at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed, and the ready-to-win state is achieved. expressed. Also, in this character image display effect, an effect is performed in which the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and a button image XB2 is displayed on the right side of the action image XB1. The button image XB2 is an image representing the effect button 63 and an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 . Inside the button image XB2, the character "Keep hitting!" In this button display effect 1, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), effect presentation 1 is performed. This effect production 1 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. Specifically, the display of the action image XB1 and the button image XB2 is continued, and the effect image XB3 is displayed. . This effect image XB3 is a blue effect, is arranged so as to cover the periphery of the action image XB1, and changes the shape of the outer peripheral portion of the effect image XB3 (region (area) of the effect image XB3). In the drawing, the effect image XB3 is hatched. At this time, the action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue color as the effect image XB3 as the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 . As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 1, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), effect presentation 2 is performed. This effect production 2 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from blue to green. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 2, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), effect production 3 is performed. This effect production 3 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from green to red, respectively. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 2, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from the character CRA appears, and a development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggesting image XB4 is an image suggesting development to a super ready-to-win effect, and displays the characters "development!". The display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), a big win symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in doubles (seven patterns in doubles), which is a performance to notify a big win. Note that the character CRB continues to be displayed.

[Image superimposition button effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining image superimposition button effect B. FIG. The image superimposition button effect B is a effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect B, as shown in FIG. 72(A), first, a character image display effect is performed. This character image display effect is performed during the ready-to-win state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a character image XB11 and a chance up image XB12. Each action image XB1 has the same outline shape. The character image XB11 is composed of a yellow "E" character. The chance-up image XB12 is composed of characters "chance" suggesting expectations for a big win in a rectangular frame. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a so as not to contact each other. In addition, in this character image display effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are formed with the same number pattern "7" at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed, and the ready-to-win state is achieved. expressed. Also, in this character image display effect, an effect is performed in which the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and a button image XB2 is displayed on the action image XB1 (character image XB11 and chance up image XB12). The button image XB2 is an image representing the effect button 63 and an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 . Inside the button image XB2, the character "Keep hitting!" In this button display effect 1, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), effect presentation 1 is performed. This effect production 1 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. Specifically, the display of the action image XB1 and the button image XB2 is continued, and the effect image XB3 is displayed. . This effect image XB3 is a blue effect, is arranged so as to cover the periphery of the action image XB1, and changes the shape of the outer peripheral portion of the effect image XB3 (region (area) of the effect image XB3). In the drawing, the effect image XB3 is hatched. At this time, the action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue color as the effect image XB3 as the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 . As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 1, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), effect production 2 is performed. This effect production 2 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from blue to green. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 2, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), effect production 3 is performed. This effect production 3 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from green to red, respectively. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 2, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from the character CRA appears, and a development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggesting image XB4 is an image suggesting development to a super ready-to-win effect, and displays the characters "development!". The display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(G), a big win symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in doubles (seven patterns in doubles), which is a performance to notify a big win. Note that the character CRB continues to be displayed.

[Image superimposition button effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition button effect C. FIG. The image superimposition button effect C is a effect performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a character image display effect is performed. This character image display effect is performed during the ready-to-win state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a character image XB11 and a chance up image XB12. Each action image XB1 has the same outline shape. The character image XB11 is composed of a yellow "E" character. The chance-up image XB12 is composed of characters "chance" suggesting expectations for a big win in a rectangular frame. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a so as not to contact each other. In addition, in this character image display effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are formed with the same number pattern "7" at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed, and the ready-to-win state is achieved. expressed. Also, in this character image display effect, an effect is performed in which the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and a button image XB2 is displayed on the action image XB1 (character image XB11 and chance up image XB12). The button image XB2 is an image representing the effect button 63 and an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 . Inside the button image XB2, the character "Keep hitting!" In this button display effect 1, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), effect production 1 is performed. This effect production 1 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. Specifically, the display of the action image XB1 and the button image XB2 is continued, and the effect image XB3 is displayed. . This effect image XB3 is a blue effect, is arranged so as to cover the periphery of the action image XB1, and changes the shape of the outer peripheral portion of the effect image XB3 (region (area) of the effect image XB3). In the drawing, the effect image XB3 is hatched. At this time, the action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue color as the effect image XB3 as the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 . As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 1, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), effect presentation 2 is performed. This effect production 2 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from blue to green. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 2, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), effect presentation 3 is performed. This effect production 3 is produced by repeatedly hitting the production button 63 by the player. repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from green to red, respectively. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the big win has increased. In this effect production 2, the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the production of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from the character CRA appears, and a development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggesting image XB4 is an image suggesting development to a super ready-to-win effect, and displays the characters "development!". The display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), button display effect 2 is performed. This button display effect 2 is a effect in which the button image XB2A and the heart-shaped image XB5 are displayed. The button image XB2A is an image representing the effect button 63 and an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 . Inside the button image XB2A, a character "Press!" is displayed, prompting the player to press the effect button 63 once. The heart-shaped image XB5 is a heart-shaped icon image. The button image XB2A and the heart-shaped image XB5 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and the button image XB2A is arranged closer to the viewer than the heart-shaped image XB5. The display of the character CRB is continued, and the display of the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), a big win symbol display effect is performed. This jackpot symbol display effect is an effect performed when the player presses the effect button 63 once. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in doubles (seven symbols). , It is a production to inform the jackpot. Note that the character CRB continues to be displayed.

In the above-described image superimposition button effect C, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the more the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change, that is, the more the effect effect progresses, the higher the expectation for the big win. ing. However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lowered as the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change, that is, as the effect rendering progresses.

Further, in the image superimposed button effect C, the button image XB2 and the button image XB2A are buttons of the same shape, but they are not limited to this, and may be buttons of different shapes.

[Modification]
In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the shape of the outer periphery of the effect image XB3 (the area (area) of the effect image XB3) is changed in the effect effects 1 to 3. However, the effect image is not limited to this. A configuration in which the shape of the outer peripheral portion of XB3 (the region (area) of the effect image XB3) is fixed without being changed may be employed.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 including the character image XB11 and the button image XB2 are displayed. , blue, green, and red, but is not limited to this. can be
Further, in the image superimposed button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 including the character image XB11 and the button image XB2 are displayed. The aspect (for example, color, shape, pattern) may be changed step by step like the action image XB1 or the effect image XB3 of effect productions 1-3.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the change in the display mode (color) of the action image XB1 and the change in the display mode (color) of the effect image XB3 are the same. The change in the display mode may be different from the change in the display mode of the effect image XB3. For example, when the color of the action image XB1 changes from yellow to red, the color of the effect image XB3 may change from blue to purple.

In the image superimposed button effects of the above embodiment, the character image display effects, button display effects 1 and 2, effect effects 1 to 3, and development suggestive effects are performed during the ready-to-win state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating in a state other than the ready-to-win state, or while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are still displayed (for example, while waiting for customers (demonstration screen)). .

In the image superimposition button effects B and C of the above embodiment, the three action images XB1 are superimposed, and then the button image XB2 is arranged on the action image XB1. A button image XB2 may be arranged in advance on the image XB1, and in that state, a superimposed effect may be performed to form one image in which the button image XB2 is arranged on the action image XB1.

In the image superimposed button effect C of the above-described embodiment, the button image XB2 and the button image XB2A have different characters (included characters), but they may have the same structure. For example, the button image XB2 and the button image XB2A may each include the characters "Hit!" or the characters "Press!".

[Effect example]
In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 including the character image XB11 and the button image XB2 are displayed. color) from yellow to blue, green, and red. According to this configuration, the character image XB11 and the button image XB2 are displayed, so that the player operates the effect button 63, and the display mode of the action image XB1 changes step by step according to the operation. , it is possible to give the player a sense of participation in the game and a feeling of anticipation for a big win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 63 to change the display mode (color) of the action image XB1 from yellow to blue, green, and red, the effect button 63 , the effect image XB3 is displayed, and the display mode of the effect image XB3 is also changed to blue, green, and red. According to this configuration, when the player operates the button 63, the display mode of the action image XB1 changes step by step, and the effect image XB3 also changes step by step. It is possible to give a sense of expectation for a larger jackpot while giving a real feeling that the game is being played. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 whose display mode changes when the player operates the effect button 63 includes the character image XB11. According to this configuration, the player can change the color of the characters by his or her own operation, and the player can feel that he/she is participating in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 63 to change the action image XB1, the effect image XB3 is used as an image to be changed. When the player is changing the action image by his or her own operation, the effect image XB3 can be changed at the same time, so that the player can feel that he/she is participating in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is a display effect for displaying a first image;
the second display effect is a display effect for displaying an operation means image representing the operation means;
the third display effect is a display effect for changing the display mode of the first image from the first mode to the second mode by operating the operation means;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect displays a second image different from the first image, and changes the display mode of the second image from the third mode to the fourth mode by operating the operation means. It is a display production that changes,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the display mode of the first image is changed to the second mode, and then changed to the fifth mode by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
wherein the first image is a character image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
wherein the second image is an effect image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character selection effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. In FIGS. 74 to 76, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. 74 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect A, FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect B, and FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect C. FIG.

In this character selection effect, the player presses the effect button 63 provided on the front frame 53 or presses the select button 68 having up, down, left and right press buttons (upper press operation of the upper press button, right press of the right press button). operation, lower pressing operation of the lower pressing button, left pressing operation of the left pressing button), a desired character (a specific character preferred by the player) is selected from a plurality of characters, or a random character is selected on the gaming machine 1 side. It is a production that allows you to select a character for each character. When the player selects a character in the character selection effect, after that, a special effect of changing the mode of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols can be executed. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a character selection effect, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. to display an image on the display screen 7a.

Here, the effect symbols will be briefly explained first, and the character selection effect A, the character selection effect B, and the character selection effect C will be explained in order.

[Direction design]
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown for example in FIG. In each variable area from the upper side to the lower side, each production pattern is the number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number A variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated in the order of "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... be.

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are card type effect patterns as normal effect patterns, and the number patterns (number "1" to number "9 ”) is attached with a number pattern and a corresponding character pattern. The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are configured with various character patterns having multiple colors (full color), respectively, and the character patterns are displayed large as the main effect pattern. be. Therefore, the size of the number pattern is smaller than the size of the character pattern attached to the number pattern. The normal production pattern is not a variable production (variable display) in the special production described later, but a variable production (variable display) in the normal production. In this way, since the number symbols (odd number symbol and even number symbol) each have a color, for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number symbol and displayed temporarily. Then, the ready-to-win is formed, and then the production is developed. It is possible for the player to get an opportunity to discover the relationship (regularity) between the performance and the performance. As a result, the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a color, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

Specifically, the character A is attached to the number "1", the character B is attached to the number "2", the character C is attached to the number "3", and the character D is attached to the number "4". The character E is attached to the number "5", the character F is attached to the number "6", and the character A is attached to the number "7" (a different display mode from the character A attached to the number "1"). ) is attached to the number "8", the character C is attached to the number "8" (the display mode is different from the character C attached to the number "3"), and the number "9" is attached to the character A G is attached. In this way, although the character A is duplicated with the numbers "1" and "2", and the character C is duplicated with the numbers "3" and "8", the patterns of the characters are different. are displayed differently.

As described above, the normal production pattern was a card type production pattern, but when a special production different from the normal production is started after the character selection production is performed, a special production different from the normal production pattern It switches from the normal production pattern to the pattern. In this special performance design, the card graphics and character designs that make up the normal performance design disappear, and the size of the number design is enlarged to the size of the character design, and only the number design is included. However, it is smaller than the size of the figure on the card (one to two times smaller than the size of the figure on the card). In other words, in the special effect pattern, unlike the effect pattern of the card type which is the normal effect pattern, the effect pattern is a simple number pattern. The color of the number pattern in this special effect pattern inherits the color of the number pattern in the normal effect pattern as it is. For this reason, even the special effect symbols have the same color as the normal effect symbols, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and " 9' all have the same bright green color, and even numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern once moves upward in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) and then slowly (low speed) moves ( In other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move, and then the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The performance pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In the state of the temporary stop display, the performance pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIGS. A variable icon 9C corresponding to the pattern 8R is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation. In this first holding display area, holding icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four holding display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four holding icons 9A can be stocked. It is possible to do so. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation performance (variation display) of the performance symbols. In addition to the holding icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be easily discerned by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are always arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Because the image is displayed behind the screen, visibility is not hindered by other images.

Note that the background image used in the special effect (referred to as a "special background image") is a special image that is not normally included in the background image. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an undersea image, or an underground image. Special background images include special images such as space images, spacecraft images, base images, and game hall images. The normal background image and the special background image may be still images or moving images.

[Character selection effect A]
Next, the character selection effect A will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 74(A), a city image HG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is completed. The symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are all card-type effect patterns as normal effect patterns. ) are attached with a number pattern and a corresponding character pattern. The left effect pattern 8L is stop-displayed with a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La and a character pattern 8Lb attached thereto, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern 8Cb. is stopped and displayed, the right effect symbol 8R is a bright blue number "6" symbol 8Ra, and the character symbol 8Rb is added to the symbol 8Rb, and the change icon 9C is displayed on the display screen because the deviation is confirmed. disappeared from 7a.

Here, the pending icon 9A is displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad to the third pending display position 9Ad, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After that, the character selection effect A is started in a state where the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R is continued. When the character selection effect A is started, as shown in FIGS. 74(C) and (D), the left effect pattern 8L which is the normal effect pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C which is the normal effect pattern, and the right effect pattern which is the normal effect pattern. The effect pattern 8R is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and further, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are displayed. It is not displayed on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the character selection image CSG is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Along with this, the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). Even in the state where the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of the first special figure reservations based on the number of game balls entering the first start port 20 is set to the number of the above-described reserved balls as a numerical value. on the left with blue numbers, and on the right with red numbers the number of the second special pending based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a while being spaced apart from each other. ing.

The character selection image CSG is partitioned into eight areas (multiple areas) radially extending outward from the center of the display screen 7a, thereby forming eight option images. These eight option images include seven option images for selecting seven characters, character A to character G, and one character selected randomly from character A to character G on the gaming machine 1 side. There is one choice image and . The seven characters, character A to character G, are the same as the character patterns (character A to character G) that are touched by the number patterns that make up the normal effect pattern described above.

Of the eight option images, clockwise from the upper option image, "character A" is an option image for selecting character A, "character B" is an option image for selecting character B, and character C. ``Character C'', which is an option image for selecting , ``Character D,'' which is an option image for selecting character D, and an option image for randomly selecting one character on the gaming machine 1 side, `` Random”, an option image for selecting character E, “character E”, an option image for selecting character F, “character F”, and an option image for selecting character G, “character G”. are allocated and placed.

As a result, one character is randomly selected on the side of the game machine 1 for the lower option image opposite to the option image "Character A" for selecting the character A arranged in the upper option image. "Random", which is an option image for , is arranged, and "Character A" and "Random" are arranged on the same vertical line. ``Character B'', which is an option image for selecting character B, and ``Character E'', which is an option image for selecting character E, are arranged on the opposite side of the option image, and ``Character B'' and ``Character E'' are arranged. are arranged on the same upward straight line. ``Character F'', which is an option image for selecting character F, is arranged in the option image on the opposite side of ``character C'', which is an option image for selecting character C, and ``character C'' and ``character F'' are arranged. are arranged on the same horizontal line. ``Character G'', which is an option image for selecting character G, is arranged on the opposite option image to ``Character D'', which is an option image for selecting character D, and ``Character D'' and ``Character G'' are arranged. are arranged on the same downward-sloping straight line.

An operation of selecting and determining a character will be described on the front side of the option image so as to fit within the option image "Character D" for selecting the character D on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. An operation guide area BS1 for the operation is provided as a horizontally long rectangular shape. In the operation guide area BS1, a production button image BG modeled on the production button 63 is arranged on the left side thereof, and a select button image SG modeled on the select button 68 having up, down, left, and right push buttons is arranged on the right side thereof. there is Both the effect button image BG and the select button 68 are in a blinking display mode.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the currently selected character (in other words, the previously selected character) and the corresponding option image blink (see FIG. 74(C)). Here, "Character A" is blinking because the currently selected character is Character A. In this state, every time the right push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the flashing of "character B", the flashing of "character C", the flashing of "character D", and the flashing of "random" are performed clockwise from "character A". ” blinks, “Character E” blinks, “Character F” blinks, “Character G” blinks, “Character A” blinks, “Character B” blinks, and so on. Then, only the selected option image blinks. Each time the left push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option images are repeatedly selected counterclockwise, and only the selected option image blinks. Each time the upper push button or the lower push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option image opposite to the currently blinking option image is selected, and only the selected option image blinks. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite character and presses the performance button 63, the selected character is determined. When the player presses the select button 68 to select random and presses the production button 63, random is determined.

It should be noted that the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the pressing operation of the effect button 63 are treated as being valid until the character selection determination time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the character selection image CSG is displayed. It's like If there is no pressing operation of the select button 68 or pressing operation of the effect button 63 within the character selection determination time (15 seconds in this embodiment) after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character selection determination time is reached. When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character corresponding to the option image blinking when the character selection image CSG is displayed is considered to be selected again and determined (the option image blinking when the character selection image CSG is displayed is " If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined again).

Further, when the select button 68 is pressed but the effect button 63 is not pressed until the character selection determination time (in this embodiment, 15 seconds) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, When the character selection decision time has passed, it is assumed that the character corresponding to the blinking option image selected by pressing the select button 68 has been selected and determined (the blinking option image selected by pressing the select button 68 is selected). If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined).

When the player presses the select button 68 to select "Character E" and presses the effect button 63 to confirm, or when the player presses the select button 68 to select "Character E" and selects the character When the selection determination time elapses (see FIG. 74(D)), the character selection effect A ends, and the special effect starts as shown in FIG. 74(E).

In this special effect, the player selects one of "character A", "character B", "character C", "character D", "character E", "character F", and "character G" in character selection effect A. It is a production that starts when you select or, and a production that does not start when you select “random”.

When the special effect is started, the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are hidden on the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the normal background image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Instead, it switches to the spacecraft interior image HG2 as a special background image. At this time, the image CRE of the upper half of the character (character E in this case) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG is arranged on the near side of the spacecraft interior image HG2 and is displayed largely in the center of the display screen 7a, and is changed. The icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged in front of the character E and displayed on the display screen 7a again. In this state, the variable effects (variable display) of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are still continued, but they are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a). are). Also, at this time, the voice of the voice actor in charge of the character E is played from the speaker 67 . Examples of the voice include "Character E is here", "I will support you", and the like.

Note that the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are not displayed on the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the special background image instead of the normal background image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Even in the state of switching to the spacecraft interior image HG2, the number of the above-described reserved balls is set as a numerical value, and the number of the first special figure reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side and the second number. The number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is displayed in red numerals arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state separated from each other on the right side.

After that, the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are hidden on the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the spacecraft interior image HG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a special background image. After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the switching, as shown in FIG. It is placed in front of the image CRE of the upper half of the body and displayed on the display screen 7a again. At this time, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are switched from the card type effect pattern to the special effect pattern as the normal effect pattern. As described above, in this special effect pattern, the figure of the card and the pattern of the character which make up the normal effect pattern disappear, and the size of the number pattern is enlarged to the size of the character pattern, and only the number pattern exists. It has become a thing. In other words, from the time of FIG. 74(F), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are respectively the special effect symbols, and the variable effect (variable display) is performed by the number patterns. In addition, the size of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E is much larger than the size of each of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, which are the special effect patterns. The display mode is conspicuous compared to the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R in which the image CRE is a special effect pattern.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 74(G) and (H), first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" which is the special effect pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is the number "5" which is the special effect pattern. , and finally the medium performance pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number ``7'', which is a special performance pattern, and the same pattern is not temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stop-displayed to confirm the deviation. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Also in FIGS. 74(G) and (H), the image CRE of the upper half of the character E is displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIGS. 74(G) and (H), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol. It is also possible to adopt a display mode in which the display is stopped after that, and the deviation is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

Further, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the spacecraft interior image HG2 as the special background image is changed to the base image as the special background image on the display screen 7a. Switch to HG3. At this time, an image (here, character The image CRE of the upper body of the character E with no wings of E) is displayed on the front side of the base image HG3 and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. A display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, a first pending display position 9Ad to a fourth pending display position 9Ad are arranged in front of the character E and displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, at this time, the left effect pattern 8L, which is a special effect pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C, which is a special effect pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R, which is a special effect pattern, are hidden again on the display screen 7a (from the display screen 7a disappears again), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a special effect is produced along with this. 74(J), the base image HG3, which is the special background image, is switched again to the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 74(J). At this time, the image CRE of the upper body of the character E without the wings of the character E disappears from the display screen 7a, and a horizontally long rectangular character display area BS2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. A partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of the character E is enlarged and displayed in the character display area BS2. The character display area BS2 is arranged in front of the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and in front of the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E displayed in the character display area BS2 is blocked by the right performance pattern 8R so as not to be difficult to see.

Also, when the special effect ends (in other words, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. ), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are switched from the special effect pattern to the card type effect pattern as the normal effect pattern. When the special effect ends (in other words, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moved to the variable display position 9Cd and became the variable icon 9C. From the time point of FIG. 74(J), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are each changed to the normal effect pattern (variable display).

First, when the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the number "1" symbol 8La having a bright green color as the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Lb is temporarily stopped, then, as shown in FIG. 74(K), the right effect symbol 8R is displayed. is temporarily stopped with a bright red number "7" symbol 8Ra attached to a character symbol 8Rb. After that, the same symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Also in FIG. 74(K), the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of the character E is also displayed in the character display area BS2. In FIGS. 74(J) and (K), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol. It is also possible to adopt a display mode in which the display is stopped after that, and the deviation is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, which are the normal production patterns, change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and become a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. . When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all. In FIG. 74L as well, the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of the character E is also displayed in the character display area BS2.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, which are the normal production patterns, are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern which is the normal production pattern is displayed. When the performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are all stop-displayed in the same pattern, the win is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started. .

In this way, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of variable effects (multiple variable displays) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, which are normal effect symbols, are displayed. ) are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of the character E is displayed in the character display area BS2.

Also, when a special effect is performed, in FIGS. 74(F) to (H), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are special effect patterns and constitute normal effect patterns. The figure of the card and the figure of the character disappear, and the size of the number figure is enlarged to the size of the figure of the character. (It is one to two times smaller than the size of the figure on the card). Therefore, when the character E selected by the player appears (is displayed) as the image CRE of the upper body of the character E on the display screen 7a, it contributes to making the image CRE of the upper body of the character E stand out. can be done.

Note that once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of variable effects (multiple variable displays) by the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, which are normal effect symbols, are displayed. The character is straddled and displayed on the display screen 7a, but when the character selection effect A is performed again, the player selects the same character (here, character E (“character E”)) as the previous one. 74(E), the character E will appear in the effects shown in FIG. 74(E) and after. Also, when the character selection effect A is performed again, if the player selects and determines a character different from the previous time (for example, character B (“character B”)), a special effect is performed, and the above-described FIG. E) Character B will appear in the subsequent presentation.

In addition, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, as described above, a plurality of variable effects (a plurality of ) are displayed on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, when the non-display condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of times of a plurality of variable effects (a plurality of variable displays) reaches 100), the character display area BS2 is hidden on the display screen 7a (from the display screen 7a disappear). After the special performance is performed, even if the special performance ends and returns to the normal performance (that is, even if the special performance pattern returns to the normal performance pattern), the character selection performance A is performed again. selects a character, a special effect is performed again.

[Character selection effect B]
Next, the character selection effect B will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75(A), the city image HG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is completed. The symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are all card-type effect patterns as normal effect patterns. ) are attached with a number pattern and a corresponding character pattern. The left effect pattern 8L is stop-displayed with a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La and a character pattern 8Lb attached thereto, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern 8Cb. is stopped and displayed, the right effect symbol 8R is a bright blue number "6" symbol 8Ra, and the character symbol 8Rb is added to the symbol 8Rb, and the change icon 9C is displayed on the display screen because the deviation is confirmed. disappeared from 7a.

Here, the pending icon 9A is displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad to the third pending display position 9Ad, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After that, the character selection effect B is started while the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R is continued. When the character selection effect B is started, as shown in FIGS. 75(C) and (D), the left effect pattern 8L which is the normal effect pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C which is the normal effect pattern, and the right effect pattern which is the normal effect pattern. The effect pattern 8R is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and further, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are displayed. It is not displayed on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the character selection image CSG is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Along with this, the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). Even in the state where the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of the first special figure reservations based on the number of game balls entering the first starting port 20 is set to the number of the above-described reserved balls as a numerical value. on the left side with blue numbers, and on the right side with red numbers the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. ing.

The character selection image CSG is divided into eight areas (plurality of areas) radially extending outward from the center of the display screen 7a to form eight option images. These eight option images include seven option images for selecting seven characters, character A to character G, and one character selected randomly from character A to character G on the gaming machine 1 side. There is one choice image and . The seven characters, character A to character G, are the same as the character patterns (character A to character G) that are touched by the number patterns that make up the above-described normal effect pattern.

Of the eight option images, clockwise from the upper option image, "character A" is an option image for selecting character A, "character B" is an option image for selecting character B, and character C. ``Character C'', which is an option image for selecting , ``Character D,'' which is an option image for selecting character D, and an option image for randomly selecting one character on the gaming machine 1 side, `` Random”, an option image for selecting character E, “character E”, an option image for selecting character F, “character F”, and an option image for selecting character G, “character G”. are allocated and placed.

As a result, one character is randomly selected on the side of the game machine 1 for the lower option image opposite to the option image "Character A" for selecting the character A arranged in the upper option image. "Random", which is an option image for , is arranged, and "Character A" and "Random" are arranged on the same vertical line. ``Character B'', which is an option image for selecting character B, and ``Character E'', which is an option image for selecting character E, are arranged on the opposite side of the option image, and ``Character B'' and ``Character E'' are arranged. are arranged on the same upward straight line. ``Character F'', which is an option image for selecting character F, is arranged in the option image on the opposite side of ``character C'', which is an option image for selecting character C, and ``character C'' and ``character F'' are arranged. are arranged on the same horizontal line. ``Character G'', which is an option image for selecting character G, is arranged on the opposite option image to ``Character D'', which is an option image for selecting character D, and ``Character D'' and ``Character G'' are arranged. are arranged on the same downward-sloping straight line.

An operation for selecting and determining a character will be described on the front side of the option image so as to fit within the option image "Character D" for selecting the character D on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. An operation guide area BS1 for the operation is provided as a horizontally long rectangular shape. In the operation guide area BS1, a production button image BG imitating the production button 63 is arranged on the left side thereof, and a select button image SG imitating the select button 68 having up, down, left, and right push buttons is arranged on the right side thereof. there is Both the effect button image BG and the select button 68 are in a blinking display mode.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the currently selected character (in other words, the previously selected character) and the corresponding option image blink (see FIG. 75(C)). Here, "Character A" is blinking because the currently selected character is Character A. In this state, every time the right push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the flashing of "character B", the flashing of "character C", the flashing of "character D", and the flashing of "random" are performed clockwise from "character A". ” blinks, “Character E” blinks, “Character F” blinks, “Character G” blinks, “Character A” blinks, “Character B” blinks, and so on. Then, only the selected option image blinks. Each time the left push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option images are repeatedly selected counterclockwise, and only the selected option image blinks. Each time the upper push button or the lower push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option image opposite to the currently blinking option image is selected, and only the selected option image blinks. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite character and presses the performance button 63, the selected character is determined. When the player presses the select button 68 to select random and presses the production button 63, random is determined.

It should be noted that the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the pressing operation of the effect button 63 are treated as being valid until the character selection determination time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the character selection image CSG is displayed. It's like If there is no press operation of the select button 68 or the effect button 63 before the character selection determination time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character selection determination time is reached. When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character corresponding to the option image blinking when the character selection image CSG is displayed is considered to be selected again and determined (the option image blinking when the character selection image CSG is displayed is " If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined again).

Further, when the select button 68 is pressed but the effect button 63 is not pressed until the character selection determination time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed after the character selection image CSG is displayed, When the character selection determination time elapses, it is assumed that the character corresponding to the option image selected and blinking by pressing the select button 68 is selected and determined (the option image selected and blinking by pressing the select button 68 is selected and determined). If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined).

When the player presses the select button 68 to select "random" and presses the effect button 63 to confirm, or the player selects "random" by pressing the select button 68 to select the character. When the time elapses (see FIG. 75(D)), character selection effect B ends accordingly, and as shown in FIG. 75(E), character selection effect A starts in FIG. 75(B), the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are not displayed on the display screen 7a (character selection The image CSG and the operation guide area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image HG1, which is the original normal background image, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, and so on. The fourth reserved display position 9Ad is arranged in front of the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and displayed on the display screen 7a again. At this time, without switching from the card type production pattern to the special production pattern as the normal production pattern, the card type production pattern is again displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal production pattern, left production pattern 8L, medium production pattern 8C and right production pattern. A variable performance (variation display) is performed by each of the performance symbols 8R by the normal performance symbols.

In addition, when the player selects "random" by pressing the select button 68 and presses the effect button 63 to confirm, or when the player selects "random" by pressing the select button 68 and the character When the selection determination time elapses, a character display area BS2 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Here, since the player selects "random" in the character selection image CSG, the character is arbitrarily selected on the side of the gaming machine 1 (in the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) (here, the character C is selected), and a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C is enlarged and displayed in the character display area BS2. The character display area BS2 is arranged in front of the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and in front of the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C displayed in the character display area BS2 is blocked by the right performance pattern 8R so as not to be difficult to see.

As described above, the special effects are assumed to be "character A", "character B", "character C", "character D", "character E", and "character F" in the character selection effect B. , “Character G” is selected, and the effect is not started when “Random” is selected. Here, since the player has selected "random" in the character selection effect B, the special effect is not started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(F), when the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the numeral "1" having bright green in the left effect symbol 8L and the symbol 8Lb of the character is temporarily stopped, then as shown in FIG. As shown in (G), the character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" having a bright red right effect symbol 8R, and is temporarily stopped, and finally the figure having a bright blue middle effect symbol 8C. A symbol 8Cb of a character is added to the symbol 8Ca of "6" and temporarily stopped and displayed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIGS. 75F and 75G as well, the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRC of the character C is also displayed in the character display area BS2. . In FIGS. 75(F) and (G), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol. It is also possible to adopt a display mode in which the display is stopped after that, and the deviation is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, which are the normal production patterns, all at once (at the same time) change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and become a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. . When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, a state in which only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested is present. . In FIG. 75H, the character display area BS2 is also displayed, and a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C is also displayed in the character display area BS2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(I), first, the left effect pattern 8L is stop-displayed by adding the character pattern 8Lb to the number "3" pattern 8La, and then the right effect pattern 8R has a bright blue color. The character pattern 8Rb is attached to the number "2" pattern 8Ra and is stopped and displayed, and finally the medium effect pattern 8C is attached to the number "7" pattern 8Ca having a bright red color and the character pattern 8Cb is attached to the temporary stop display. , the same symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 75(I) as well, the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRC of the character C is also displayed in the character display area BS2. In FIG. 75(I), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed. , may be displayed in a stopped state, and a display mode in which the deviation is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, which are the normal production patterns, all at once (at the same time) change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and become a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. . When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all. Although the character display area BS2 is also displayed in FIG. 75(J), here, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRC of the character C is displayed in the character display area BS2. there is This is because the player selects "random" when the character selection effect B is performed, so the character displayed in the character display area BS2 is a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C. ) to a partial image of the upper body image CRE of the character E (the portion from the chest to the face). Of course, this character CRC is a character arbitrarily selected on the side of the game machine 1 (in the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90). Therefore, the characters arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) may happen to be the same character in the previous game and the current game.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, which are the normal production patterns, are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern which is the normal production pattern is displayed. When the performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are all stop-displayed in the same pattern, the win is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started. .

In this way, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of variable effects (multiple variable displays) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, are displayed. ) are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the character displayed in the character display area BS2 is arbitrarily selected on the side of the game machine 1 (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) each time a plurality of variable effects (a plurality of variable displays) are straddled. A partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C is displayed. The number of times the plurality of variable effects (plurality of variable displays) straddled (the number of times the variable effects were performed (the number of times the variable display was performed)) is also arbitrary on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90). has been determined. Therefore, the period during which the character is displayed in the character display area BS2 can be made random, and variations are provided between the character in the character display area BS2 and the period during which the character is displayed in the character display area BS2. It is possible to do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the non-display condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of times the character is arbitrarily determined on the game machine 1 side (in the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) reaches 10 times), the character The display area BS2 is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a).

Note that the characters arbitrarily selected on the side of the game machine 1 (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) are shown in FIGS. It is designed to switch every two times of variable performance (two times of variable display). However, instead of two variable effects (two variable displays), it may be switched every fixed number of variable effects (fixed number of variable displays) (for example, five variable effects (five times of variable display) It may be switched every variable display), may be switched every 10 times of variable performance (variable display of 10 times), or may be switched every 15 times of variable performance (variable display of 15 times). ), It may be switched by a random number of variable effects (random number of variable displays) (for example, 7 times of variable effects (7 times of variable displays) → 3 times of variable effects (3 times variable display) → 10 times variable performance (10 times variable display) → 5 times variable performance (5 times variable display) → 5 times variable performance (5 times variable display) → 9 times variable performance ( 9 times of fluctuation display) → It may be switched like . . .).

[Character selection effect C]
Next, the character selection effect C will be described with reference to FIG. In the character selection effect C, all of the pending icons 9A are consumed, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is completed, and the character selection effect C is stopped and displayed. 68 is operated, and when the battle effect is performed, the enemy character selected by the player in the character selection effect C appears, and the special effect is started. In this embodiment, after the character selection effect C, the battle effect is always performed in the first variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol.

As shown in FIG. 76(A), when the character selection effect C is started, the left effect pattern 8L which is the normal effect pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C which is the normal effect pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R which is the normal effect pattern are displayed. It is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and further, the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a). , the character selection image CSG is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Even in the state where the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of the first special figure reservations based on the number of game balls entering the first starting port 20 is set to the number of the above-described reserved balls as a numerical value. on the left side with blue numbers, and on the right side with red numbers the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. ing.

The character selection image CSG is for selecting an enemy character to fight against the ally character CRA in the battle production from among a plurality of enemy characters. character, enemy character in the center, and enemy character on the right side) are arranged at regular intervals as option images. In other words, three option images are arranged on the same horizontal line with equal intervals. The plurality of enemy characters includes seven enemy characters: enemy character CRB, enemy character CRC, enemy character CRD, enemy character CRE, enemy character CRF, enemy character CRG, and enemy character CRH.

At the lower right side of the display screen 7a, an operation guide area BS1 is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape for explaining an operation of selecting and determining an enemy character. In the operation guide area BS1, a production button image BG imitating the production button 63 is arranged on the left side thereof, and a select button image SG imitating the select button 68 having up, down, left, and right push buttons is arranged on the right side thereof. there is Both the effect button image BG and the select button 68 are displayed in a blinking manner.

Also, an enemy character random option image, which is an option image for randomly selecting one of a plurality of enemy characters on the gaming machine 1 side, is displayed below the left enemy character and on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. An ACB (random choice image ACB) is provided as a horizontally long rectangular shape.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the enemy character option image corresponding to the currently selected enemy character (in other words, the previously selected enemy character) blinks. Here, since the currently selected enemy character is the enemy character CRC, the option image arranged in the center of the display screen 7a is displayed and blinking. An option image for selecting the enemy character CRD is arranged and displayed to the left of the enemy character CRC, and an option image for selecting the enemy character CRB is arranged and displayed to the right of the enemy character CRC. To the left of the enemy character CRD, an arrow image prompting the user to press the left push button of the select button 68 is arranged and displayed blinking in red. An arrow image prompting an operation is arranged and displayed in blinking red. Both arrow images are for displaying other enemy characters on the display screen 7a.

In this state, each time the right push button of the select button 68 is pushed, three enemy characters displayed on the display screen 7a at equal intervals on the same horizontal line (the left enemy character is selected) are displayed. , the option image for selecting the central enemy character, and the option image for selecting the right enemy character), the option image for selecting the left enemy character moves to the left. It disappears from the display screen 7a, and the display mode for selecting the enemy character in the center switches from the blinking display mode to the non-blinking display mode, moves leftward, and is arranged on the option image for selecting the enemy character on the left side. is displayed, and the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right side moves leftward and is arranged in the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center, and the display mode is switched from a non-blinking display mode to a blinking display mode. , which newly appears on the display screen 7a from the right side of the display screen 7a and is arranged and displayed in the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right side. Here, in FIG. 76A, each time the right push button of the select button 68 is pushed, the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center is enemy character CRB→enemy character CRH→enemy character CRG→enemy. The reels rotate leftward in the order of character CRF→enemy character CRE→enemy character CRD→enemy character CRC→enemy character CRB→enemy character CRH→. When the performance button 63 is pressed, the central enemy character is determined. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite enemy character and presses the performance button 63, the selected central enemy character is determined.

On the other hand, each time the left push button of the select button 68 is pushed, three enemy characters (to select the left enemy character) displayed on the display screen 7a at equal intervals on the same horizontal line are displayed. , the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center, and the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right), the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right moves to the right and is displayed on the screen. 7a, the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center switches from the blinking display mode to the non-blinking display mode, moves to the right, and is arranged and displayed on the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right side. and the option image for selecting the enemy character on the left side moves rightward and is arranged in the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center, and is displayed by switching from a non-blinking display mode to a blinking display mode, It is arranged and displayed in the option image for newly appearing on the display screen 7a from the left side of the display screen 7a and selecting the enemy character on the left side. Here, in FIG. 76A, each time the left push button of the select button 68 is pushed, the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center is enemy character CRB->enemy character CRC->enemy character CRD->enemy. The reels rotate rightward in the order of character CRE→enemy character CRF→enemy character CRG→enemy character CRH→enemy character CRB→enemy character CRC→ . When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite enemy character and presses the performance button 63, the selected central enemy character is determined.

Every time the upper push button or the lower push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the selection of the central enemy character is switched to the selection of the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB), and the central enemy character is non-blinking. The enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) becomes active and blinks, or the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) is selected to select the enemy character in the center. , the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) becomes a non-blinking display mode, and the selection of the enemy character in the center becomes effective and the display mode becomes a blinking display mode. When the player presses the select button 68 to select an enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) and presses the production button 63, random is determined.

It should be noted that the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the pressing operation of the effect button 63 are treated as valid until the character selection determination time (in this embodiment, 60 seconds) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed. It's like If there is no pressing operation of the select button 68 or pressing operation of the effect button 63 within the character selection determination time (60 seconds in this embodiment) after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character selection determination time is reached. When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the enemy character blinking when the character selection image CSG is displayed (that is, the enemy character in the center) is considered to be selected again and determined (when the character selection image CSG is displayed, the enemy character is randomly selected). When the option image ACB (random option image ACB) is blinking, it is assumed that "random" has been selected and determined again).

Further, when the selection button 68 is pressed but the effect button 63 is not pressed until the character selection decision time (in this embodiment, 60 seconds) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, When the character selection determination time elapses, it is assumed that the enemy character in the center has been selected and determined (when the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) is flashing by pressing the select button 68, " deemed to be randomly selected and determined).

The special effects are such that the player selects "enemy character CRB", "enemy character CRC", "enemy character CRD", "enemy character CRE", "enemy character CRF", "enemy character CRG", "enemy character CRB", "enemy character CRC", "enemy character CRG", " This effect is started when one of the "enemy characters CRH" is selected, and is not started when "random" is selected.

First, in FIG. 76(A), when the player selects the enemy character CRB (that is, when the enemy character CRB is arranged as the central enemy character on the display screen 7a and is displayed in a blinking display mode), then character selection is performed. When the character selection determination time (in this embodiment, 60 seconds) elapses after the image CSG is displayed, the character selection effect C ends accordingly, and the character selection image CSG is displayed as shown in FIG. 76(B). , the operation guide area BS1 and the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) are not displayed on the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG, the operation guide area BS1 and the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) are hidden on the display screen 7a). disappears from the display screen 7a), the city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed again. be done. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are all card type effect patterns as normal effect patterns. ) are attached with a number pattern and a corresponding character pattern. The left effect pattern 8L is stop-displayed with a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La and a character pattern 8Lb attached thereto, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern 8Cb. is stopped and displayed, the right effect pattern 8R is a bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ra, and the character pattern 8Rb is added to the pattern 8Rb, and the deviation is confirmed, so the variation icon 9C is displayed on the display screen. disappeared from 7a.

In this state, when only three gaming balls enter the first starting port in succession, the holding icon 9A is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad to the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad. does not show the pending icon. In other words, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 8C, the variable effect (variable display) of the right effect pattern 8R is started, and the display screen 7a is switched to the spacecraft interior image HG2 as a special background image instead of the normal background image. At this time, a battle production is started. Along with this, a special effect is started. When the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character (here, the enemy character CRB) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG as the opponent of the ally character CRA appears on the display screen. 7a appears from the left side, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Although the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are arranged on the near side of the spacecraft interior image HG2 and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the size of the enemy character CRB is larger than the size of the ally character CRA. , in the battle production, the enemy character CRB is displayed in a more conspicuous presence than the ally character CRA.

An ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are arranged on the front side of the spacecraft interior image HG2 and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect which are undergoing a variable effect (variable display). A pattern 8R is arranged on the front side of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. The holding display position 9Ad is also arranged in front of the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, in addition to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R which are in the process of variable effect (variable display), the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are also obstructed by the battle effect by the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB so as not to become difficult to see.

In addition, when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad in FIG. 76(C) moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol In 8R, the normal effect pattern is switched from the card type effect pattern to the special effect pattern. As described above, in this special effect pattern, the figure of the card and the pattern of the character which make up the normal effect pattern disappear, and the size of the number pattern is enlarged to the size of the character pattern, and only the number pattern exists. It has become a thing. That is, from the point of time of FIG. 76(C), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are respectively special effect patterns, and the variable effect (variable display) is performed by the numerical pattern. In addition, the size of the enemy character CRB is extremely large compared to the sizes of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R, which are the special effect patterns, and the enemy character CRB is the special effect pattern. Compared with the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, the display mode is conspicuous.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(D), first, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" which is the special performance symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" which is the special performance symbol. Finally, the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7" which is a special effect pattern, and the same pattern is not temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stop-displayed to confirm the deviation. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 76(D), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed. , may be displayed in a stopped state, and a display mode in which the deviation is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the special effect ends, as shown in FIG. 76(E). Then, the display screen 7a switches again from the base image HG3, which is the special background image, to the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are changed from the special production pattern to the normal The effect pattern is switched to a card type effect pattern, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. That is, from the point of time of FIG. 76(E), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are respectively changed to the normal effect pattern (variable display).

First, when the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the number "1" symbol 8La having a bright green color as the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Lb is temporarily displayed, then, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the right effect symbol 8R is displayed. is temporarily stopped with a bright red number "7" symbol 8Ra attached to a character symbol 8Rb. After that, the same symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 76(F), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed. , may be displayed in a stopped state, and a display mode in which the deviation is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, and the normal effect pattern is displayed. The left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, which are the normal production patterns, are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern which is the normal production pattern is displayed. When the performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are all stop-displayed in the same pattern, the win is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started. .

On the other hand, in FIG. 76(A), when the player selects the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB), the character selection decision time (in this embodiment, the character selection determination time after the character selection image CSG is displayed) 60 seconds), the same screen as that of FIG. 76(B) is displayed as shown in FIG. 76(G). Description is omitted here.

In this state, when only three game balls enter the first starting port in succession, the holding icon 9A is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad to the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad. does not show the pending icon. In other words, there are only three pending icons 9A stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 8C, the variable effect (variable display) of the right effect pattern 8R is started, and the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a without switching to the special background image. At this time, without switching from the card type performance pattern to the special performance pattern as the normal performance pattern, the card type performance pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal performance pattern, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern. Each of the symbols 8R is subjected to a variable effect (variable display) by a normal effect pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(I), the friendly character CRA does not appear from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the player selects "random" in the character selection image CSG as an opponent for the friendly character CRA. In the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90), only the enemy character selected arbitrarily (in this case, the enemy character CRD is selected) appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. However, there is no battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character CRD is arranged in front of the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and is displayed largely in the center of the display screen 7a. 8R is arranged in front of the enemy character CRD and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is arranged in front of the character CRD and displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, in addition to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R which are in the process of variable effect (variable display), the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are also obstructed by the effects of the enemy character CRD so as not to become difficult to see.

In addition, in FIGS. 76(H) and (I), the ally character CRA does not appear, but the ally character CRA may appear. In this case, when the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and since the player has selected "random" as the opponent of the ally character CRA, the game machine 1 side (sub An arbitrarily selected enemy character (in this case, the enemy character CRD is selected by the performance control microcomputer 91 of the control board 90) appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. and the enemy character CRD fight. Although the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD are arranged in front of the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the size of the enemy character CRD is larger than the size of the ally character CRA. The display mode is such that the enemy character CRD stands out more than the ally character CRA in the battle production.

After that, first, when the character symbol 8Lb is added to the number "1" symbol 8La having a bright green color as the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Lb is temporarily displayed, then the right effect symbol 8L is displayed as shown in FIG. 76(J). A character pattern 8Rb is attached to a number "7" pattern 8Ra having a bright red pattern 8R, and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and finally, a medium effect pattern 8C has a bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern. 8Cb is added and a temporary stop display is made, and the same symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed, and then a stop display is made to confirm the loss. In FIG. 76(J), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed. , may be displayed in a stopped state, and a display mode in which the deviation is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, which are the normal production patterns, all at once (at the same time) change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and become a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. . When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, a state in which only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested is present. .

Thereafter, when the left performance symbol 8L, the medium performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R, which are the normal performance symbols, are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol When the performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In this way, when the player selects an enemy character when the character selection effect C is performed, as a special effect, in FIGS. As the image is switched to the spacecraft interior image HG2, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are switched from the card type effect pattern to the special effect pattern as the normal effect pattern, and the variation (fluctuation by the variation icon 9C When the effect (variation display)) is completed and the next variation is started (when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C), the At 76(E), the base image HG3, which is the special background image, is switched again to the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, on the display screen 7a. The right performance pattern 8R is switched from a special performance pattern to a card-type performance pattern as a normal performance pattern, and a variable performance (variation display) of the performance pattern is started.

On the other hand, when the player selects random, one enemy character out of the plurality of enemy characters is arbitrarily selected on the side of the gaming machine 1 (by the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90), and is shown in FIG. In H) to (J), the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, is displayed on the display screen 7a without switching to the special background image, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are the special background images. When the variation (variation effect (variation display) by the variation icon 9C) is completed without switching to the effect symbol, and the next variation is started (first reservation display position When the suspended icon 9A displayed in 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. At the same time, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are continued with the card type effect pattern which is the normal effect pattern, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started.

In addition, in FIGS. 76C and 76D, which are performed as special effects when the character selection effect C is performed, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are special effect patterns. In this case, the card graphics and character designs that make up the normal performance design disappear, and the size of the number design is enlarged to the extent that it becomes the size of the character design, and only the number design is included. It is smaller than the size of the figure (one to two times smaller than the size of the figure on the card). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to making the enemy character CRB stand out when the enemy character CRB selected by the player appears (is displayed) on the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the special effect is performed, even if the special effect ends and returns to the normal effect again (that is, even if it returns from the special effect pattern to the normal effect pattern), as described above, the character When the player selects a character when the selection performance C is performed again, the special performance is performed again.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection effect A of FIG. 74, the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C of FIG. A lottery for ``hit'' or ``losing'' (based on acceptance at the ball receiving port) is performed, and the lottery result of this lottery ``hitting'' or ``losing'' can be notified. , an image display device 7 (display means) for displaying right performance symbols 8R (a set of performance symbols), and a plurality of option images including a plurality of character images are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) to play the game. The player can operate the select button 68 (operating means) or the effect button 63 (operating means) to execute a first effect of selecting one option image from a plurality of option images. (Figs. 74(C) and (D) for the character selection effect A, Figs. 75(C) and (D) for the character selection effect B, and Fig. 76(A) for the character selection effect C). When one option image selected in the first effect is one of a plurality of character images, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a special effect different from the normal effect is executed. (Figs. 74(E) to (I) as special effects in character selection effect A, and Figs. 76(C) and (D) as special effects in character selection effect C). According to this configuration, the player can select one option image from a plurality of option images by operating the select button 68 (operating means) or the effect button 63 (operating means). Therefore, the player can select his or her favorite character image. Furthermore, since the special effect is executed only when the player selects a character image that he/she likes, the player can easily select the select button 68 (operating means) or press the effect to see the special effect. The button 63 (operating means) is positively operated, and the desire to operate the select button 68 (operating means) and the performance button 63 (operating means) can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second effect in the character selection effect B of FIG. 75 and the character selection effect C of FIG. When it is not the character image, the normal effect can be executed (for the character selection effect B, the normal effect is shown from FIG. 75(E), and for the character selection effect C, the normal effect is shown from FIG. 76(H). ). According to this configuration, the player operates the select button 68 (operating means) or the effect button 63 (operating means) to select a character image as one option image from among a plurality of option images, instead of selecting another image ( In character selection effect B, a special effect is executed when "random" in FIG. 75(D) is selected, and in character selection effect C, when "enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB)" in FIG. 76(A) is selected. Since the normal effect is executed without any delay, the player positively operates the select button 68 (operating means) or the effect button 63 (operating means) to see the special effect. , the desire to operate the select button 68 (operating means) and the production button 63 (operating means) can be further improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special effects in the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect C of FIG. When displayed on the display means), it is displayed larger than the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R (each production pattern in a set of production patterns) (Fig. 74 (E) in the character selection production A) 76(C) and (D) for the image CRE of the upper body of the character E in (I) and the character selection effect C). According to this configuration, the character image preferred by the player is displayed larger than the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns). The image can be displayed in a conspicuous display mode compared to the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R (each production pattern in a set of production patterns), and the left production pattern 8L and the middle production pattern tend to be monotonous. 8C, since it is possible to give a change to the variable production (variation display) of the right production pattern 8R, the monotony of the fluctuation production (variation display) of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R can be mitigated.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the character selection effect A of FIG. 74, the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C of FIG. When it is within the period from the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbol 8R (each performance symbol in a set of performance symbols) to the stop display, or the game ball enters the first start port 20. No (not accepted by the ball receiving port) Left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R (each production pattern in a set of production patterns) are executed when fluctuation production (variation display) is not performed. It is possible to do so. According to this configuration, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in a set of effect symbols) are in the variable effect (variable display), the player presses the select button 68 ( operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means) to select one option image from among a plurality of option images. You can have more opportunities to choose. In addition, the game ball does not enter the first start port 20 (is not accepted into the ball receiving port), and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are displayed. When the variable performance (variable display) is not performed, the game ball does not easily enter the first start port 20 even when the player is actually playing the game, or the game machine 1 is in a customer waiting state. Sometimes when starting a game, the player can be given the opportunity to select his or her favorite character image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the character selection effect B in FIG. 75 and the normal effect in the character selection effect C in FIG. ), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R (each production pattern in a set of production patterns), the number “1” (number pattern) to the number “9” ( A character pattern (ornamental image) is added to a number pattern), which is variably displayed as a normal effect pattern and then stopped. Character selection effect A in FIG. 74 and special effects in character selection effect C in FIG. )), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R (each production pattern in a set of production patterns) are replaced by the number "1" (number pattern), which is the pattern of the numbers that make up the normal production pattern. ~ The number "1" (number design), which is the number design of the number "9" (number design) and the character design (decorative image) ~ The size of the number "9" (number design) is enlarged and the character (decorative image), and is displayed variably and then stopped. The size of the special effect pattern is smaller than the size of the normal effect pattern. According to this configuration, the variable performance (variable display) of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R (each performance pattern in a set of performance patterns) can be performed by the normal performance pattern or the special performance pattern. Also in this respect, the monotonousness of the variable effects (variable display) of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R can be reduced.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a special effect is executed in the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the second effect of the character selection effect C of FIG. Each performance pattern in a set of performance patterns) is variably displayed as a special performance pattern and then stop-displayed, and when ``loss (failure)'' is announced as a lottery result of ``hit'' or ``loss'', the first display is again performed. Until the production is executed, the special production is not executed and the normal production is executed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the character selection effect is changed and then stopped to notify the lottery result of "win" or "lose" (in the character selection effect A, see FIG. 74 (E ) to (L), and (C) to (F) in the character selection effect C). According to this configuration, when the special effect is executed, thereafter, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are changed as special effect patterns (fluctuation display) is not continued, but once, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are variably displayed as special effect symbols, and then stopped and displayed. Then, in the next variable effect (variable display) (that is, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C), the normal from the special effect pattern Since it is designed to switch to the performance pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the special performance pattern.

[Modification]
A modification of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Character selection effect A in FIG. 74, character selection effect B in FIG. 75, and character selection effect C in FIG. there were. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state (normal game state). However, it may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 210 which is the ball receiving port. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state (specific game state different from the normal game state). Alternatively, the game ball may be triggered by passing through the gate 28 which is the ball receiving port.

[Modification 2]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of the character E is displayed in the character display area BS2. The character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, may perform an action that changes the variable icon 9C or the pending icon 9A. For example, the character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, may shoot a ball of light from the sword toward the variable icon 9C, hit the variable icon 9C, and change the icon to a variable icon 9C' with a high degree of expectation. As a so-called look-ahead effect, the ball may be shot toward the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A may be changed to a hold icon 9A' with a higher degree of expectation for winning. In the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C is displayed in the character display area BS2. The character C, which is the image CRC of the upper half of the body, may perform an action that causes a change in the variable icon 9C or the pending icon 9A. For example, the character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, may shoot a ball of light from his sword toward the variable icon 9C, and change the variable icon 9C into a variable icon 9C' with a high degree of expectation by hitting the variable icon 9C. However, as a so-called look-ahead effect, the ball may be shot toward the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A may be changed to a hold icon 9A' with a high degree of expectation.

[Modification 3]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of the character E is displayed in the character display area BS2. The character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, may be a moving image that moves around in the character display area BS2, or may be a moving image that jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a. For example, a character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a. or, for example, by moving toward the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad and slashing this pending icon 9A with a sword. ', or the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R (the middle production pattern 8C is in the middle production (variation display)) that are temporarily stopped and displayed without matching the same number patterns. In order to align with one of the number symbols, it may be moved to the other performance symbol and cut with a sword to align with the same number symbols to form a reach. In the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C is displayed in the character display area BS2. The character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, may be a moving image that moves around in the character display area BS2, or may be a moving image that jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a. For example, a character C, which is an image CRC of the upper body, jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a. or, for example, by moving toward the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad and slashing this pending icon 9A with a sword. ', or the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R (the middle production pattern 8C is in the middle production (variation display)) that are temporarily stopped and displayed without matching the same number patterns. In order to align with one of the number symbols, it may be moved to the other performance symbol and cut with a sword to align with the same number symbols to form a reach.

[Modification 4]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of the character E is displayed in the character display area BS2. The character E, which is the image CRE of the upper half of the body, may be changeable by throwing items from the character display area BS2 toward the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, and various performance symbols. For example, items can include swords, treasure chests, light bulbs, icons, and the like. When an item collides with the variable icon 9C, the impact image makes the variable icon 9C difficult to see, and as the effect image disappears, the variable icon 9C appears and changes to a variable icon 9C with a higher degree of expectation for winning, or does not change. In some cases, the current variable icon 9C remains unchanged. When the item collides with the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad, the effect image that collides makes the pending icon 9A difficult to see, and as the effect image disappears, the pending icon 9A appears, increasing the expectation of winning. The icon may be changed to the reserved icon 9A, or may remain the current reserved icon 9A without any change. When an item collides with, for example, the left production pattern 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left production pattern 8L becomes difficult to see due to the colliding effect image, and as the effect image disappears, the left production pattern 8L appears and is the same as the right production pattern 8L. It changes to a number pattern, forms a reach, or remains the current left direction pattern 8L without changing to the same number pattern as the right direction pattern 8L.

[Modification 5]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74, the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C of FIG. The card has a number design (number "1" to number "9") with a character design corresponding to the number design. The number "1" is assigned the character A, the number "2" is assigned the character B, the number "3" is assigned the character C, the number "4" is assigned the character D, and the number " The character E is attached to the number "5", the character F is attached to the number "6", and the character A is attached to the number "7" (the display mode is different from the character A attached to the number "1". ) is attached to the number "8", the character C is attached to the number "8" (the display mode is different from the character C attached to the number "3"), and the character G is attached to the number "9". rice field. In this way, the character A is attached to the numbers "1" and the numbers "2" and duplicated, and the character C is attached to the numbers "3" and the numbers "8" and is duplicated. Seven characters, character A to character G, may be divided into two groups, and a symbol representing each group may be attached to the normal effect pattern. For example, four characters, character A, character C, character E, and character G, belong to group A (in other words, a character attached to an odd-numbered pattern), and the group symbol "A" is It is attached to the lower left side of the normal production pattern, and three characters, character B, character D, and character F, belong to the B group (in other words, the characters attached to the even-numbered pattern), and the group symbol is A certain "B" is attached to the lower left side of the normal production pattern.

[Modification 6]
The character selection effect A of FIG. 74, the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C of FIG. The card has a number pattern (number “1” to number “9”) with a character pattern corresponding to the number pattern, whereas a special effect pattern As a result, the figure of the card and the figure of the character, which constitute the normal performance figure, disappear and the size of the number figure is enlarged to the size of the figure of the character, and only the figure of the number is provided. However, the structure of the normal effect pattern and the structure of the special effect pattern may be exchanged. In other words, the card-type effect pattern is used as the special effect pattern, and the number pattern (number "1" to number "9") in the card is configured so that the character pattern corresponding to the number pattern is attached. On the other hand, it is assumed that the figure of the card and the character pattern that constitute the special effect pattern disappear as the normal effect pattern, and the size of the number pattern is enlarged to the size of the character pattern, and only the number pattern is included. may be configured.

[Modification 7]
The character selection effect A of FIG. 74, the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C of FIG. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A game machine comprising a display means for displaying a set of performance symbols capable of drawing a lottery based on the reception of a game ball into a ball receiving slot and informing the result of the lottery,
a first effect in which a plurality of option images including a plurality of character images are displayed on the display means and the player operates the operation means to select one option image from the plurality of option images;
a second effect of executing a special effect different from the normal effect when the one option image selected in the first effect is one of the plurality of character images;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
The second effect executes the normal effect when the one option image selected in the first effect is not one of the plurality of character images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
In the special effect, when the character image, which is the one option image selected in the first effect, is displayed on the display means, the character image is displayed larger than each effect symbol in the set of effect symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2 or aspect D1-3,
The first effect is performed during a period from when each effect symbol in the set of effect symbols is variably displayed to when it is stopped and displayed, or when the game ball is not received in the ball receiving port and the Executable when each production pattern in a set of production patterns is not displayed in a variable manner,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-2 to D1-4,
In the normal production, each production pattern in the set of production patterns is variably displayed as a normal production pattern constituted by attaching a decorative image to a number pattern, and then stop-displayed,
In the special effect, each effect pattern in the set of effect patterns is enlarged in size of the number pattern and the decorative image constituting the normal effect pattern to have the decorative pattern. Stop display after changing display as a special effect pattern configured without
The size of the special effect pattern is smaller than the size of the normal effect pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5,
When the special performance is executed in the second performance, each performance symbol in the set of performance symbols is variably displayed as the special performance symbol and then stop-displayed, and the failure is notified as the lottery result, the above-mentioned again. By executing the normal performance without executing the special performance until the first performance is executed, the performance symbols in the set of performance symbols are variably displayed as the normal performance symbols and then stopped and displayed. Execute a third effect that notifies the lottery result,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Display effects A to C by the effect device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 to 79, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and various decorative members arranged in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be omitted for ease of viewing of the drawing. 77 is a diagram for explaining the display effect A by the effect device, FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the display effect B by the effect device, and FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the display effect C by the effect device. It is a diagram.

Here, the case where the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless transparent member which is a transparent flat plate member is not attached to the central opening of the front frame 53 but is attached to the game board 2 will be described. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the game board 2 so as to be arranged between the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the decorative member 10 formed of a colored opaque member. Thus, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7→illumination panel (light guide plate) 18→decorative member 10 are arranged forward on the game board 2 in this order. Although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the front side of the image display device 7 , the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is the same as the size of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Since it is formed about two times smaller than the circumference, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but covers a part of the display screen 7a.

Further, here, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are formed of a colorless transparent member, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are formed of a colorless transparent member. By irradiating light from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) from the respective end faces, the light emission mode can be changed. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 have light guide portions formed along their outer peripheries. Light from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) is emitted from each end face of the object 14R, and the light guide portion emits light, so that the outer shape (outline) of the object 14R emits light.

The display effect by this effect device is such that various movable accessories (the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, the third A movable accessory 17), an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a decorative member 10, etc. are arranged in front of the display screen 7a. Among the images displayed on the display screen 7a via the movable accessory 15), the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, etc., the first specific movable accessory (the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15 ), the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 or the like can be visually displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear. Among the images displayed on the display screen 7a through the movable accessory (third movable accessory 17), the decorative member 10, etc., the display screen corresponding to the rear of the second specific movable accessory, the decorative member 10, etc. In some cases, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area 7a.

That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a display effect by the effect device, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15, and an image is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal device provided in the third movable accessory 17. An image is displayed on the display screen of the (liquid crystal panel) 17a, and an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member .

Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a display effect by the effect device, the position of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is determined. , the position of the third movable accessory 17 provided on the game board 2 is changed, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 formed by a colorless transparent member provided on the game board 2 are changed. The position of the role object 14R can be changed, and LEDs (multicolor light emission) can be emitted from the end surfaces of the left side movable role object 14L and the right side movable role object 14R of the first movable role object 14 formed by a colorless transparent member provided on the game board 2. Illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless transparent member provided on the game board 2 changes its own light emission mode by irradiating light from a full-color LED (possible full-color LED). ) to display an image on an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 .

The structure of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15, the structure of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) provided in the decorative member 10 The structure of the panel 13 is the same as that of the image display device 7 . In other words, various images displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized by the built-in backlight in the image display device 7 emitting light. Various images displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a become visible when the built-in backlight in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 emits light. ing. Various images displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a become visible when the built-in backlight in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 emits light. ing. Various images displayed on the display screen can be visually recognized by emitting light from a built-in backlight in a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 .

The display effect by the effect device includes the image display device 7, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15 (the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15), and the third movable accessory 17. (Sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17), illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, decorative member 10 (sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10), etc. It is designed to be carried out using

Further, the plurality of movable accessories (plurality of movable bodies) such as the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 17 are When any one movable accessory (one movable body) or two movable accessories (two movable bodies) are operated during a variable performance (variable display) of a plurality of performance patterns, a plurality of movable accessories ( Compared to when all of the multiple movable bodies) are not operated, the hit occurs after the variable performance (variable display) of the multiple performance symbols is completed (that is, after the multiple performance symbols are stopped and displayed). This suggests to the player that the degree of expectation is high. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable role 14, the operation of the second movable role 15, and the operation of the third movable role 17.

When a predetermined image is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by irradiation of light from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is turned on. Compared to the case where light from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) is not emitted from the end surface and a predetermined image is not displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the variable performance (variable display) of a plurality of performance patterns is improved. This suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that a win will occur after the game ends (that is, after a plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the players are highly interested in displaying a predetermined image on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 .

Here, first, the effect symbols will be briefly described, and then the display effect A by the effect device, the display effect B by the effect device, and the display effect C by the effect device will be described in order.

[Production pattern]
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, as shown in FIG. It is a production design, and the number design (number "1" to number "9") in the card is attached with the design of the character corresponding to the number design. The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are configured with various character patterns having multiple colors (full color), respectively, and the character patterns are displayed large as the main effect pattern. be. Therefore, the size of the number pattern is smaller than the size of the character pattern attached to the number pattern. In this way, since the number symbols (odd number symbol and even number symbol) each have a color, for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number symbol and displayed temporarily. Then, the ready-to-win is formed, and then the production is developed. It is possible for the player to get an opportunity to discover the relationship (regularity) between the performance and the performance. As a result, the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a different color, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

Specifically, the character A is attached to the number "1", the character B is attached to the number "2", the character C is attached to the number "3", and the character D is attached to the number "4". The character E is attached to the number "5", the character F is attached to the number "6", and the character A is attached to the number "7" (a different display mode from the character A attached to the number "1"). ) is attached to the number "8", the character C is attached to the number "8" (the display mode is different from the character C attached to the number "3"), and the number "9" is attached to the character A G is attached. In this way, although the character A is duplicated with the numbers "1" and "2", and the character C is duplicated with the numbers "3" and "8", the patterns of the characters are different. are displayed differently.

The left effect pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in the respective variable regions from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. ” → Number 2 → Number 3 → Number 4 → Number 5 → Number 6 → Number 7 → Number 8 → Number 9 → Number 1 → Number 2 ” → .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern once moves upward in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) and then slowly (low speed) moves ( In other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move, and then the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The performance pattern is decelerated immediately before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 77(A), it corresponds to the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the digestion of the first special figure reservation. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation. In this first holding display area, holding icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four holding display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four holding icons 9A can be stocked. It is possible to do so. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9A displayed at the suspended display position 9Ad.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation performance (variation display) of the performance symbols. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are always arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Because the image is displayed behind the screen, visibility is not hindered by other images.

[Display effect A by effect device]
Next, the display effect A by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 77(A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. At this time, both the second movable accessory 15 and the third movable accessory 17 are in a stationary state at the retracted position, and the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 and the third movable accessory 17 are displayed. The image is not displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17. FIG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the second movable accessory 15 starts to move from the retracted position toward the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a). An image is displayed on the display screen of the provided sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a. This image is the same as the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 based on the position of the second movable accessory 15. there is That is, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the second movable accessory 15 moving in front of the display screen 7a. Since the first image is blocked by the second movable accessory 15, the first image, which is the blocked image, is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. , the first image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. there is When the second movable accessory 15 starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 is the background image. A certain city image HG1 becomes a medium production pattern 8C during a variable production (variable display).

The arm member 15b (the arm member 15b is colored and opaque and has a design) moves the second movable accessory 15 from the retracted position to the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a). The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the member 15b is difficult to see.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 is moving from the retracted position to the advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a), it blinks as a display mode in which one lightning bolt runs from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen 7a. The flash image IG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) (the flash image IG1 displayed in a display mode in which one lightning bolt is displayed is a moving image (moving image)). At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 is the city image HG1 that is the background image, and the middle effect pattern during the variable effect (variable display). 8C, a flash image IG1.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 reaches the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a) from the retracted position and becomes stationary, as shown in FIG. 77(C), the third movable accessory 17 retracts. When it starts to move from the position toward the advanced position, it is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17, based on the position of the third movable accessory 17. The displayed image is blocked by the third movable accessory 17 . That is, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the third movable accessory 17 that moves in front of the display screen 7a is displayed in an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the third movable accessory 17. Two images are blocked by the third movable accessory 17 . The second image, which is the blocked image, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, and the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) provided in the third movable accessory 17 is not displayed at all. ) 17a, the second image can be made invisible. At this time, the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the left effect symbol 8L during the variable effect (variable display).

Thereafter, blinking flash images IG2 and IG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) as a display mode in which two lightning bolts run from the upper left to the lower right of the display screen 7a (two lightning bolts The flash images IG2 and IG2 displayed in a display mode in which the dashes are moving images (moving images). At this time, the first image (that is, the The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15) is the city image HG1 that is the background image, and the medium effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display). , resulting in two flash images IG2 and IG2. On the other hand, no image is still displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided for the third movable accessory 17 that is moving toward the advanced position. , The second image (that is, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17) is still blocked by the third movable accessory 17 and is difficult to see. It has become. In FIG. 77C, the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the left effect symbol 8L during the variable effect (variable display).

After that, when the flash images IG2 and IG2 disappear from the display screen 7a and the third movable accessory 17 reaches the advanced position from the retracted position and becomes stationary (the advanced position of the third movable accessory 17 is the second A position where the third movable accessory 17 and the second movable accessory 15 do not overlap (interfere) with each other in the front-rear direction when the movable accessory 15 is stopped at its advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a). The right end of the third movable accessory 17 and the left end of the second movable accessory 15 are separated by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 10 mm).) As shown in FIG. 77(D), the image On the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 instead of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a is 1 As a display mode in which two lightning bolts run, a blinking flash image IG3 is displayed as a third image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) (a display mode in which one lightning bolt runs). is a moving image (moving image)). Even at this point, the blinking flash image IG3 is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, so the image corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 is displayed. The second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the device 7 is in a state where it is difficult to see through the third movable accessory 17. FIG. In FIG. 77(D), the second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image, the left effect symbol 8L during the variable effect (variable display), the third reserved display position 9Ad and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. (If there is a pending icon 9A at the third pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A is also included). In this way, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17. The second image is not displayed, and a third image called a blinking flash image IG3, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

The third image was a flash image IG3, but depending on the type of image, the degree of hit expectation for the variation (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right It suggests the hit expectation degree for the production pattern 8R). The type of image is an image different from the second image, and includes a flash image, an item image, a mini character image, a hot character image, etc. Flash image → item image → mini character image → hot text image (rich hit) In that order, the expectation of winning will increase.

After that, the flash image IG3 disappears from the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a, and as shown in FIG. It starts moving toward the position, and the third movable accessory 17 also starts moving from the advanced position to the retracted position. At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided for the second movable role object 15 that is moving toward the retracted position (that is, the rear of the second movable role object 15 and the The corresponding image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7) is the city image HG1 that is the background image, and the middle effect symbol 8C during the variable effect (variable display). On the other hand, since no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 that is moving toward the retracted position, The second image (that is, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17) is still blocked by the third movable accessory 17 and is difficult to see. It's becoming In FIG. 77(E), the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the left effect symbol 8L during the variable effect (variable display).

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and becomes stationary, and the third movable accessory 17 returns to the retracted position and becomes stationary, as shown in FIG. When the character pattern 8Lb is attached to the pattern 8La of the number "1" having the bright green color of the pattern 8L, and the character pattern 8Lb is attached to the pattern 8L, the pattern 8L of the right effect pattern 8R is displayed to the pattern 8La of the number "1" having the bright green color. A character pattern 8Lb is attached and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the middle effect pattern 8C is in a variable effect (variable display), and the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned with the same pattern and temporarily stopped to form a reach. be done. In addition, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the medium production pattern 8C is in the variable production (variation display), and the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are the same pattern. may be temporarily stopped in line with each other to form a reach.

When reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 77(G), it develops into a battle effect. In the battle production, the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a production that the degree is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not displayed on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon. 9A is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the background image is switched from the city image HG1 to the battle background image HG4. It should be noted that even in the state that has developed into the battle production, the number of the above-mentioned reserved balls is set as a numerical value, and the number of the first special figure reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by the blue numbers on the left side and the second number. The number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is displayed in red numerals arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state separated from each other on the right side.

After that, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, the background image returns (switches) from the battle-dedicated background image HG4 to the city image HG1 again as shown in FIG. The pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left effect pattern 8L is displayed. is temporarily stopped and displayed by attaching a character symbol 8Lb to a number "1" symbol 8La having a bright green color, and a character symbol 8Cb is attached to a number "2" symbol 8Ca having a bright blue color. and the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the character pattern 8Lb added to the number "1" pattern 8La having a bright green color, and then stop-displayed at the same timing and the left effect pattern 8L. , the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and the deviation is determined. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, when the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB in the battle effect, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "1"). , are stop-displayed at the same timing, and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are aligned with the same pattern (number "1" here), and the win is determined. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, after which a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are fixed. When the performance symbols 8R of the same symbols are stop-displayed, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

As described above, in the display effect A by the effect device, when the second movable accessory 15 starts to move, the position of the second movable accessory 15 is based on the position of the second movable accessory 15. The first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the corresponding image display device 7, is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. Therefore, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, is viewed through the second movable accessory 15. It is possible to do so. On the other hand, when the third movable accessory 17 starts to move, the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 is displayed based on the position of the third movable accessory 17. Since the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, the third movable The second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the accessory 17, can be made invisible through the third movable accessory 17. It's becoming

In addition, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by emitting light from its own built-in backlight, and the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 emits light from its own built-in backlight. By doing so, an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a, and the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15. A certain first image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a when the built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 emits light. Therefore, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, can be viewed through the second movable accessory 15. It is possible.

On the other hand, the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 emits light from its built-in backlight so that an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a. However, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable role 17, is the sub liquid crystal device provided in the third movable role 17. Since the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a is not displayed at all whether or not the built-in backlight in the (liquid crystal panel) 17a emits light, it corresponds to the rear of the third movable accessory 17. The second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 , can be made invisible through the third movable accessory 17 .

[Display effect B by effect device]
Next, the display effect B by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 78(A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. At this time, an image is not displayed by an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless transparent member. Further, an image is displayed on the display screen of a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decoration member 10 which is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and covers the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. It is not displayed at all. The decorative member 10 is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and fixed in a manner covering the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a.

Although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the front side of the image display device 7 as described above, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is larger than that of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it is formed about one to two times smaller than the size, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but covers a part of the display screen 7a. In addition, since the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is made of a colorless and transparent member, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is illuminated by light emitted from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end surface of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 . Even when a predetermined image is displayed on the light plate 18, the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It's becoming

The decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member and is arranged on the front lower right side of the image display device 7 and further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 . In other words, since the display screen 7a of the image display device 7→illumination panel (light guide plate) 18→decorative member 10 is arranged forward in the order of the game board 2, the image display device corresponding to the rear side of the decorative member 10 is arranged. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of 7 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see, and is displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The image may be blocked by the decorative member 10 and become difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(B), an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is irradiated with light from an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light), so that the friendly character CRA, which is an image, appears on the illumination panel (light guide plate). 18. Although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the front side of the image display device 7, it is formed of a colorless and transparent member. Even if there is, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It's like That is, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 arranged in front of the display screen 7a. Even if the friendly character CRA is displayed on an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 in which a certain first image is formed of a colorless and transparent member, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 does not completely block the first image. One image can be viewed through an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 .

At this time, the first image that can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the friend character CRA is displayed is the city image HG1 that is the background image, and the left effect pattern during the variable effect (variable display). 8L, middle effect symbol 8C during variable effect (variable display), right effect symbol 8R during variable effect (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A, above-mentioned reserved ball (The number of the first special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is indicated by the blue number on the left, the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 The number of pending numbers is indicated by red numerals arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side.

On the other hand, the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, is arranged on the lower right side in front of the image display device 7, and covers the lower right region (part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 . That is, of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the decorative member is arranged on the front right side of the image display device 7 and covers the lower right region of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a). The second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to 10, is blocked by the decorative member 10. As shown in FIG. The second image, which is an image to be blocked, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, and the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10. It is possible. At this time, the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (variable display). At the time of FIG. 78B as well, no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 .

Since the decorative member 10 is further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the region of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is decorated. It may be blocked by the member 10 . The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating LED light from the end surface. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the direction and color of light emitted from the LEDs. Therefore, an image displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be blocked by the decorative member 10 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(C), an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is irradiated with light from an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light), so that the friendly character CRA, which is an image, appears on the illumination panel (light guide plate). The upper half of the winged ally character CRA is displayed as a third image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 in the state displayed in 18 . Even at this time, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. Further, when the image displayed in the region of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10, it is difficult to see. In addition, in FIG. 78C, the second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image, and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (variable display). In this way, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 shows the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. A third image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

The third image was a mini-character image, which is a winged ally character CRA. 8L, middle production pattern 8C, and right production pattern 8R). The type of image is an image different from the second image, and includes a flash image, an item image, a mini character image, a hot character image, etc. Flash image→item image→mini character image→hot text image (rich hit) In that order, the expectation of winning will increase.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(D), an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is irradiated with light from an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light), so that the friendly character CRA, which is an image, appears on the illumination panel (light guide plate). 18, the flash FL jumps into the display screen 7a from the outer side of the lower side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the lower side so as to draw a counterclockwise elliptical orbit, and moves toward the right side of the display screen 7a. and jumps out to the outside of the right side of the display screen 7a, jumps into the display screen 7a again from the outside of the upper side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the upper side, stops near the center of the display screen 7a, and explodes. (The flash FL is a moving image (moving image)). The flash FL is arranged in front of the city image HG1, which is the background image, and is arranged and displayed behind various production patterns during the variable production (variable display). The first image that can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the friend character CRA is displayed in the state where the flash FL is displayed on the display screen 7a is the city image HG1 that is the background image and the flash FL. , left production pattern 8L during variable production (variable display), medium production pattern 8C during variable production (variable display), right production pattern 8R during variable production (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, Variation icon 9C and holding icon 9A, the number of holding balls described above is indicated by a numerical value (the number of the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is indicated by a blue number on the left, to the second starting port 21 The number of second special figure reservations based on the number of game balls entered is displayed in red numbers on the upper right side of the display screen 7a while being spaced apart from each other on the right side).

On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the background image of the city image HG1, the flash FL, and the variable effect ( Variable display), the right effect pattern 8R. Even at this time, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image, remains enlarged. there is Since the decorative member 10 is further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the region of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is decorated. It may be blocked by the member 10 . In this way, even at this point in time, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and a third image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(E), by irradiating light from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end surface of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the friendly character CRA, which is an image, is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate). 18, when the character pattern 8Lb is attached to the pattern 8La of the number "1" having a bright green left effect pattern 8L and the character pattern 8Lb is temporarily stopped, then the right effect pattern 8R is bright. A character pattern 8Rb is attached to a number "2" symbol 8Ra having a blue color, and is displayed temporarily, followed by a medium effect symbol 8C having a character symbol 8Cb attached to a number "3" symbol 8Ca having a bright green color. and a temporary stop is displayed. In addition, after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

In the state where the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, they can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the teammate character CRA is displayed. The first images that can be displayed are the city image HG1 as a background image, the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed, the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed, the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped, and the variable display position. 9Cd, reservation display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and reservation icon 9A, the number of the above-described reserved balls is indicated by a numerical value (the number of the first special reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by blue numbers on the left side , the number of second special figure reservations based on the number of game balls entering the second start port 21 is displayed in red numbers on the upper right side of the display screen 7a while being spaced apart from each other on the right side). .

On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image. Even at this time, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. Since the decorative member 10 is further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the region of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is decorated. It may be blocked by the member 10 . In this way, even at this point in time, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and a third image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(F), when the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 stops emitting light from an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light), the image of the teammate character CRA is illuminated. 3 is a third image that is not displayed on a panel (light guide plate) 18 (disappears from an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18) and displayed large on the display screen of a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10; The upper body of the winged ally character CRA is hidden (the third image disappears from the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10). The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

At this time, since the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is formed of a colorless and transparent member, the first images that can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 are the city image HG1 that is the background image and the stop image. Left effect symbol 8L displayed, medium effect symbol 8C stopped, right effect symbol 8R stopped, variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, reserved icon 9A, the above-mentioned number of reserved balls Numerical values (the number of the first special reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, the number of the second special reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a while being spaced apart from each other on the right side with red numerals). On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are fixed. When the performance symbols 8R of the same symbols are stop-displayed, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

Thus, in the display effect B by the effect device, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7→illumination panel (light guide plate) 18→decorative member 10 are arranged forward in the order of the game board 2. When the teammate character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, is displayed. can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is made of a colorless and transparent member. On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is formed by the colored opaque member. Via the decorative member 10, it is possible to make it difficult to see.

In addition, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by emitting light from its own built-in backlight, and the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 emits light from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) from its end surface. , an image is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (by LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) emitting light), and the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 and the image display device 7 corresponding to The first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is made of a colorless transparent member. However, it can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 .

On the other hand, in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 by emitting light from its own built-in backlight. However, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the built-in backlight in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 regardless of whether or not it emits light. The second image, which is the image displayed in the area 7a, can be made invisible through the decorative member 10 because the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member.

[Display effect C by effect device]
Next, the display effect C by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 79(A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. At this time, the left side movable role 14L and the right side movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 formed of a colorless transparent member provided on the game board 2 are both stationary at the retracted position, and the first movable role is stationary. Light irradiation from the end surface of the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14 is stopped, and the left movable accessory 14L itself is turned off. Light irradiation from the end surface of the right movable accessory 14R of the accessory 14 is stopped, and the right movable accessory 14R itself is turned off. Further, an image is displayed on the display screen of a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decoration member 10 which is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and covers the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. It is not displayed at all. The decorative member 10 is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and fixed in a manner covering the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a.

As described above, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 have light guide portions formed along their outer peripheries. Light from LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) is emitted from the end surfaces of the accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, and the light guide section emits light, so that the outer shape (contour) of the accessory 14R emits light. It has become.

Also, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 can move forward of the image display device 7, but they are made of a colorless and transparent member. , the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is displayed on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14. It can be visually recognized through the movable accessory 14R. The decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7, and is further arranged in front of the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. That is, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and the decorative member 10 are arranged forward in this order on the game board 2, respectively. As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is not the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 formed of a colorless transparent member. It is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(B), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the front (front) central advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (they approach each other). direction). Even at this time, the irradiation of light from the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 is stopped, and the left movable accessory 14L itself is turned off. At the same time, the irradiation of light from the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end surface of the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is stopped, and the right movable accessory 14R itself is turned off. state. Since the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are made of a colorless transparent member, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move and appear on the display screen 7a. Also, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is displayed via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. so that it can be visually recognized. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The first image, which is the image that is displayed, can be visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R formed of a colorless transparent member. At this time, the first images that can be visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are the city image HG1 that is the background image, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), and the variable effect. The middle production pattern 8C during (variable display) and the right production pattern 8R during variable production (variable display). Note that when the size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the pending icon 9A are one or two times larger than the normal size in order to suggest the degree of expectation of winning, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed in the first image. may be included in In this embodiment, since the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are of normal size, they do not indicate the degree of expectation of winning and are not included in the first image.

On the other hand, the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, is arranged on the lower right side in front of the image display device 7, and covers the lower right region (part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 . That is, of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the decorative member is arranged on the front right side of the image display device 7 and covers the lower right region of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a). The second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to 10, is blocked by the decorative member 10. As shown in FIG. The second image, which is an image to be blocked, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, and the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10. It is possible. At this time, the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (variable display). At the time of FIG. 79B as well, no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(C), at the front (front) central position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, the left half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed. The decorative part and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united to form the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. A single decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion is formed. Along with this, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 is irradiated with light from the end surface of the left side movable accessory 14L (a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light), so that the outer shape (contour) of the left side movable accessory 14L itself changes to a predetermined color. In addition to being in a lighting display state, the outer shape of the right movable accessory 14R itself ( outline) is illuminated in a predetermined color. The “predetermined color” indicates the degree of expectation for winning in the fluctuation, and the degree of expectation for winning is set to be high in the order of blue → green → red → purple → yellow (gold) → rainbow color (rich hit). ing. In this embodiment, the "predetermined color" is blue. In addition, when the combined accessory of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is formed, the entirety is colored in a predetermined color (that is, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have the same color). It is designed to be lit. Alternatively, when a combined accessory is formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are lit in different colors. can be As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for winning has changed by performing a sense of incongruity effect using the colors of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.

Even in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R form a combined accessory and the entirety is lit in a predetermined color (blue), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are colorless and transparent members. Therefore, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the rear of the right movable accessory 14R can be displayed on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. It can be visually recognized through the movable accessory 14R. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The first image, which is the first image, is formed by a colorless transparent member even in a state where the combined accessory is formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R and the entirety is lit in a predetermined color (blue). It can be visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. At this time, the first images that can be visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are the city image HG1 that is the background image, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), and the variable effect. The middle production pattern 8C during (variable display) and the right production pattern 8R during variable production (variable display).

Further, when the combined accessory is formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a third image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. A large upper body of the winged ally character CRA is displayed. Even at this time, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. It should be noted that the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (variable display) in FIG. 79(C). In this way, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 shows the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. A third image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

The third image was a mini-character image, which is a winged ally character CRA. 8L, middle production pattern 8C, and right production pattern 8R). The type of image is an image different from the second image, and includes a flash image, an item image, a mini character image, a hot character image, etc. Flash image→item image→mini character image→hot text image (rich hit) In that order, the expectation of winning will increase.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(D), the flash FL jumps into the display screen 7a from the outside of the lower side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the lower side so as to draw a counterclockwise elliptical orbit. When it passes toward the right side and jumps out to the outside of the right side of the display screen 7a, it jumps into the display screen 7a again from the outside of the upper side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the upper side, stops near the center of the display screen 7a, and explodes. The display mode is changed (the flash FL is a moving image (moving image)). The flash FL is arranged in front of the city image HG1, which is the background image, and is arranged and displayed behind various production patterns during the variable production (variable display). Even in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R form a combined accessory with the flash FL displayed on the display screen 7a and the entirety is lit in a predetermined color (blue), the left side movable accessory 14L is illuminated. The first image that can be visually recognized through the right movable accessory 14R is the city image HG1 that is the background image, the flash FL, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), and the variable effect (variable display). 8C in the medium production pattern, and 8R in the right production pattern during the variable production (variable display).

On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the background image of the city image HG1, the flash FL, and the variable effect ( Variable display), the right effect pattern 8R. Even at this time, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. In this way, even at this point in time, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and a third image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(E), when the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped by adding a character pattern 8Lb to the number "1" pattern 8La having a bright green color, the right effect pattern is displayed. A character pattern 8Rb is attached to a pattern 8Ra of a number "2" in which the pattern 8R is bright blue, and is temporarily stopped and displayed, followed by a pattern 8Ca of a number "3" in which a medium effect pattern 8C is bright green. A symbol 8Cb is attached and a temporary stop is displayed. In addition, after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R form a combined accessory, and the whole is predetermined. (blue), the first image that can be visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and is temporarily stopped. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stop-displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop-displayed.

On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image. Even at this time, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. In this way, even at this point in time, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and a third image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other from the state where the combined accessory is formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R and the whole is lit in a predetermined color (blue). In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L starts to move from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward each retracted position. At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, which are moving toward the respective retracted positions, moves to the retracted positions. The left side movable accessory 14L, which is moving toward, has a city image HG1 as a background image, a left effect pattern 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a middle effect pattern 8C which is temporarily stopped and is moving toward the retreat position. In the right movable accessory 14R, the background image is the city image HG1, the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image. Even at this time, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(F), when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R return to their retracted positions and stand still, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move. From the state where each is lit in a predetermined color (blue), the left side movable role is in a state where the light irradiation of the LED (full color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end surface of the left side movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 is stopped. The object 14L itself is turned off, and the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 stops emitting light, and the right movable accessory 14R stops. The display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 hides the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image displayed large on the display screen (decorative member 10 The third image disappears from the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided for ), after that, at the same timing, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is displayed. They do not align, and the deviation is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R return to their retracted positions and become stationary, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are made of a colorless transparent member, so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are made of a colorless transparent member. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the role object 14L and the right movable role object 14R is visually recognized through the left movable role object 14L and the right movable role object 14R. The first image that can be obtained is a city image HG1, which is a background image (not shown). The second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are fixed. When the performance symbols 8R of the same symbols are stop-displayed, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

As described above, in the display effect C by the effect device, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are lit in a predetermined color (blue), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are illuminated. Since the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are formed of colorless transparent members, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to , is displayed on the left side. It can be visually recognized through the movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. On the other hand, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is formed by the colored opaque member. Via the decorative member 10, it is possible to make it difficult to see.

In addition, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by emitting light from its own built-in backlight. ), the outer shape (contour) of the left movable accessory 14L itself is illuminated in a predetermined color (by the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) emitting light), and the first By irradiating light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end surface of the right movable accessory 14R of the movable accessory 14 (by LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) emitting light), the right movable accessory 14R The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is in a state where the outer shape (contour) of itself is lit and displayed in a predetermined color. Since the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are formed of colorless and transparent members, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R each have their own outer shape (contour). Even in a state of lighting display in a predetermined color, it can be visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.

On the other hand, in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 by emitting light from its own built-in backlight. However, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the built-in backlight in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 regardless of whether or not it emits light. The second image, which is the image displayed in the area of , can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 because the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the display effect by the effect device will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images (a plurality of types of images) such as the pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, the right effect pattern 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C on the display screen 7a. A left performance pattern 8L, a middle performance pattern 8C, and a right performance pattern 8R (a set of performance patterns) capable of informing the result of winning or losing can be displayed on the display screen 7a.

In the display effect A by the effect device shown in FIG. 77, the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is arranged in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover part of the display screen 7a, and covers part of the display screen 7a. A third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is arranged at a position different from that of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) so as to cover it. The image displayed on the display screen 7a is made visible via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a is made visible via the third movable accessory 17 (first effect device). 2 production device), it is possible to execute the effects that make it difficult to see (Figs. 77(C) to (E) in the display effect A by the production device). According to this configuration, the image can be viewed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device), whereas the third movable accessory 17 ( Since it can be made invisible via the second production device), it is possible to perform the second movement while displaying the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without bothering to create a visible image and a difficult-to-visible image. Visually recognizable images and invisible images are easily created by using a role object 15 (first performance device) and a third movable role object 17 (second performance device), and provided to a player as a novel performance. It is possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) is arranged in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a. A decorative member 10 (second effect device) is arranged at a position different from an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) so as to cover the . The image displayed on the display screen 7a is made visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed by the decorative member 10 (second effect device). 78 (B) to (E) in the display effect B by the effect device) to make it difficult to see can be executed. According to this configuration, an image can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), whereas the decorative member 10 (second effect device) can be visually recognized. Therefore, the illumination panel (light guide plate) can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without bothering to create a visible image and a difficult-to-visible image. ) 18 (first effect device) and a decoration member 10 (second effect device) to easily create a visible image and an invisible image and provide them to the player as a novel effect. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. 79, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) are arranged on the display screen 7a so as to partially cover the display screen 7a. The decorative member 10 (second effect device) is arranged in different positions on the right side movable accessory 14R (first effect device) so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a (first effect device). It is The image displayed on the display screen 7a is made visible via the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a is made visible. , through the decorative member 10 (second effect device), it is possible to execute the effect of making it difficult to see (FIGS. 79(B) to 79(E) in the display effect B by the effect device). According to this configuration, the image can be viewed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 via the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). On the other hand, since it can be made invisible through the decorative member 10 (second effect device), it is not necessary to create a visible image and an invisible image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While displaying the image, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device), the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), and the decorative member 10 (second effect device) are used to display a visible image and an invisible image. Images can be easily created and provided to the player as a novel presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect in the display effect A by the effect device in FIG. The first image being displayed (for example, in FIG. 77(C), the city image HG1, the medium effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display), and the two flash images IG2 and IG2) is displayed as the second movable accessory 15. A second image (a second image ( For example, in FIG. 77(C), the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display) are displayed through the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device), making it difficult to see. It is designed to be able to According to this configuration, the first image among the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). On the other hand, since the second image can be made invisible via the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device), the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 provided to the player as an image with a different impression through the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) and the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). be able to.

The effect in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 is the first image ( For example, in FIG. 78(C), the city image HG1, the left effect symbol 8L during the variable effect (variable display), the middle effect symbol 8C during the variable effect (variable display), and the right effect symbol during the variable effect (variable display) 8R, variable display position 9Cd, suspended display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, suspended icon 9A, etc.) are made visible through an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), and a decorative member 10 (second 78(C), the second image (for example, in FIG. 78(C), the city image HG1, the right effect during the variable effect (variable display) The pattern 8R) can be made invisible through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). According to this configuration, of the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device). On the other hand, since the second image can be made invisible via the decorative member 10 (second effect device), it is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even an image with a different impression can be provided to a player as an image with a different impression through an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) or a decoration member 10 (second effect device).

The effect in the display effect C by the effect device shown in FIG. The first image displayed in the area of the screen 7a (for example, in FIG. 79(C), the city image HG1, the left effect symbol 8L during the variable effect (variable display), the middle effect symbol during the variable effect (variable display) 8C, right performance pattern 8R during variable performance (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, reserved icon 9A, etc.), left movable accessory 14L (first production device) and right movable A second image (a second image ( For example, in FIG. 79(C), the city image HG1 and the right effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display) can be made invisible via the decorative member 10 (second effect device). It's becoming According to this configuration, among the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image is the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first The second image can be made visible via the decorative member 10 (second effect device), whereas the second image can be made invisible via the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Even in the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device), the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), the decorative member 10 (second It can be provided to the player as an image with a different impression via a production device).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. The device (liquid crystal panel) 15a has a built-in backlight (first light emitting means). The effect in the display effect A by the effect device in FIG. 77 is that the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) emits light. Sometimes, the first image can be viewed through the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). Specifically, it is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) blocked by the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). When the first image displayed on the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) The sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a has a built-in backlight (first light emitting means) that emits light so that it can be visually recognized. According to this configuration, when the built-in backlight (first light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is caused to emit light, the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is illuminated. A sub-liquid crystal provided on a second movable role object 15 (first effect device) is a first image displayed in an area of a display screen 7a of an image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the role object 15 (first effect device). Since it can be displayed on the display screen of the device (liquid crystal panel) 15a, the player can correspond to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) through the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). The first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed.

In the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) is an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) that emits light from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It has (first light emitting means). The effect in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. The first image can be viewed through a panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device). Specifically, LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are emitted from the end face of an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the friendly character CRA, which is an image, is illuminated by light irradiation. (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the region corresponding to the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 arranged in front of the display screen 7a (in other words, the illumination panel (light guide plate) The first image (image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the light plate) 18 is not blocked by the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, It is made visible through an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 . According to this configuration, LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) (first light emitting means) that irradiate light from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) formed of a colorless and transparent member. , the friendly character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, but an image corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) is displayed. The first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the device 7 is passed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) formed of a colorless and transparent member. The first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the production device) can be viewed.

In the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. 79, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) are the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right side movable accessory 14L (first effect device). It has LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) (first light emitting means) that irradiate light from respective end faces of the movable accessory 14R (first effect device). The effect in the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. The first image is visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) when the full-color LED (possible full color LED) (first light emitting means) is emitting light. You can do it. Specifically, LEDs are emitted from the respective end faces of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member. (Full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is emitted, and the outer shape (contour) of itself emits light due to light irradiation, the left movable accessory 14L (first production device) and the right side movable accessory 14L (first effect device). The display screen of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) blocked by the movable accessory 14R (first effect device). The first image displayed in the area 7a is left movable without being blocked by the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). Visual recognition is possible via the accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member are viewed from the respective end faces. When an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) (first light emitting means) is caused to emit light, the outer shape (outline) of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) itself and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) change accordingly. 1 effect device) itself is in a state of emitting light, but the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) The first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear is formed by the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member and the colorless transparent member. The display screen of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) through the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). The first image displayed in the area 7a can be viewed.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. The device (liquid crystal panel) 17a has a built-in backlight (second light emitting means). The production in the display production A by the production device in FIG. Regardless of whether or not, the second image can be made invisible through the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). Specifically, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). Furthermore, the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) emits light. Also, the third image is displayed instead of the second image, and the third image is visible. In this way, regardless of whether or not the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) emits light, the third movable Via the accessory 17 (second effect device), the second image can be made invisible. According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is displayed on the third movable accessory 17 ( It is possible to make it difficult to see at all times via the second effect device).

In the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 13 has a built-in backlight (second light emitting means). The effect in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 and the effect in the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. 2 light emitting means) is emitting light, the second image can be made invisible through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Specifically, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is blocked by the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Further, even if the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is caused to emit light, the third image is displayed instead of the second image. is displayed, and the third image is made visible. In this way, regardless of whether the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device) emits light, the decorative member 10 (second It is possible to make the second image difficult to see through the effect device). According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is displayed on the decorative member 10 (second effect device). can be made invisible at all times.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. It's becoming The effect in the display effect A by the effect device in FIG. 77 is that the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) emits light. Sometimes a third image can be made visible. According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is displayed on the third movable accessory 17 ( The third image instead of the second image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) via the second effect device), while making it invisible at all times. Since the third image can be displayed and visually recognized, a new image called the third image (in other words, an image not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7) can be viewed by the player. can be provided to Furthermore, by the display of the third image, the hit expectation degree for the variation (that is, the variation effect (variation display) of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) by the change icon 9C) Since it is possible to suggest, it is also possible to increase the variation of production.

In the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. 79, the decorative member 10 (second effect device) can display a third image different from the second image. there is The effects in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. means) is emitting light, the third image can be made visible. According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is displayed on the decorative member 10 (second effect device). The third image is displayed instead of the second image on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device) while always being invisible through the third image, and the third image is visually recognized. Therefore, a new image called the third image (in other words, an image not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7) can be provided to the player. Furthermore, by the display of the third image, the hit expectation degree for the variation (that is, the variation effect (variation display) of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) by the change icon 9C) Since it is possible to suggest, it is also possible to increase the variation of production.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. A movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is a movable body that moves between a retracted position and an advanced position. A sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a having a display screen is provided in the second movable role 15 (first effect device), and a sub liquid crystal device having a display screen is provided in the third movable role 17 (second effect device). (Liquid crystal panel) 17a is provided. Since the movable body can suggest to the player that the probability of winning is higher than when it is not activated, the player is highly interested in the activation of the movable body. Therefore, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device), which is a movable body, Through the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) (that is, by displaying the first image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15), it can be visually recognized. By doing so, the sense of anticipation for winning can be aroused by the effect produced by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) which is a movable body.

In addition, in the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) are movable bodies that move between the retracted position and the advanced position. On the other hand, the decorative member 10 (second rendering device) is arranged on the front lower right side of the image display device 7 and fixed in a manner covering the lower right area (part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. , and differs from the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) in that the decorative member 10 is not provided on the movable body. Since the movable body can suggest to the player that the probability of winning is higher than when it is not activated, the player is highly interested in the activation of the movable body. Therefore, it is displayed in the areas of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 respectively corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the rear of the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), which are movable bodies. Since the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), which are movable bodies, are each formed of a colorless and transparent member, By making the left movable role 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first production device), the expectation for winning can be aroused.

[Modification]
A modification of the display effect by the effect device will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and display effect C by the effect device of FIG. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state (normal game state). However, it may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 210 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state (specific game state different from the normal game state). Alternatively, the game ball may pass through the gate 28 as a trigger.

[Modification 2]
The decorative member 10 in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. It may be an image (still image) or a moving image (moving image). Also, the content of the third image may be a combination of a still image (still image) and a moving image (moving image). By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effects of the third image.

[Modification 3]
The decorative member 10 in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. However, instead of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13, an effect device composed of a printing member on which the third image is printed and a built-in backlight (second light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. You may make it provide the 3rd image display apparatus which is this. Thereby, the third image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members on which the third image is printed may be provided so that the third image corresponding to the emitted color of the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) may be displayed respectively. In this case, the third images printed on the plurality of printing members are assumed to be different images. In this way, when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) emits red, green, blue, and white light, for example, when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) emits red light, it emits red light. The third image printed on the first printing member is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light, the third image printed on the second printing member is displayed in green light, and the built-in When the backlight (second light emitting means) emits blue light, the third image printed on the third printing member is displayed in blue light, and when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits white light, it emits white light. A third image printed on the fourth printing member is displayed with light emission. In addition, a production lamp (a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is arranged along the outer periphery of the decorative member 10 equipped with the third image display device, and the appearance (outline) of the decoration member 10 is illuminated by emitting light from the production lamp. may be configured. In this case, when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the third image display device emits light, the production lamp (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) along the outer periphery of the decorative member 10 equipped with the third image display device emits light. Light is emitted in conjunction with this.

[Modification 4]
The third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) in the display effect A by the effect device in FIG. 77, the decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78, and the display by the effect device in FIG. A production lamp (a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is arranged along the outer periphery of the decorative member 10 (second production device) in production C, and the appearance (contour) of itself is emitted by emitting light from the production lamp. may be configured. In this case, the effect lamps (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) arranged along the outer circumference of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) in the display effect A by the effect device in FIG. When the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in 17 (second effect device) emits light, it emits light in conjunction with this. In addition, the effect lamps arranged along the outer periphery of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 and the decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. (Full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) emits light in conjunction with the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device). do.

[Modification 5]
The decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device in FIG. It was fixed so as to cover (part of the display screen 7a). However, the position where the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is arranged and fixed on the lower right side of the front of the image display device 7 is set as a retracted position, and the image display device is horizontally positioned leftward from this retracted position. It may be configured as a movable body that can move to the central position (advanced position) of 7 and can move between the retracted position and the advanced position. Since the movable body can suggest to the player that the probability of winning is higher than when it is not activated, the player is highly interested in the activation of the movable body. Therefore, while displaying the third image on the decorative member 10 (second effect device), the sense of anticipation for winning can be aroused by the effect of the operation of the movable body.

[Modification 6]
In the display effect A by the effect device in FIG. 77, when the third movable accessory 17 reaches the advanced position from the retracted position and stands still, the advanced position of the third movable accessory 17 is the second movable accessory 15 itself. (the center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), the third movable accessory 17 and the second movable accessory 15 do not overlap (interfere) with each other in the front-rear direction. The right end of the third movable accessory 17 and the left end of the second movable accessory 15 are separated by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 10 mm). However, if the third movable accessory 17 can move in the space between the second movable accessory 15 and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the third movable accessory 17 can move. The accessory 17 may move behind the second movable accessory 15 and in front of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In this case, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, moves behind the second movable accessory 15 and further behind the second movable accessory 15. Since it will be blocked by the third movable role object 17 that is moving, the third movable role that is moving behind the second movable role object 15 will be in front of the first image, which is the blocked image. The images of the object 17 and the image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (flash image IG3 in FIG. 77(D))) are arranged. It will be displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. FIG.

[Modification 7]
77, the second movable accessory 15 and the third movable accessory 17 are both stationary at the retracted position, and the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) provided for the second movable accessory 15 ) 15a and the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, the image was not displayed. However, when the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position, if there is an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, it corresponds to the rear of the second movable accessory 15. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15, or another effect image (for example, the variation (An image suggesting the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation effect (variation display) by the variation icon 9C, an image representing the world view of the game board 2, an effect image, etc.) may be displayed. On the other hand, even if there is an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 when the third movable accessory 17 is stationary at the retracted position, the rear of the third movable accessory 17 and the Instead of displaying the image displayed in the corresponding area of the display screen 7a on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, another effect image (for example, the change (change icon 9C An image suggesting the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variable effect (variable display), an image representing the world view of the game board 2, an effect image, etc.) may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. The right performance pattern 8R is a card type performance pattern, and the number patterns (number '1' to number '9') in the card are attached with character patterns corresponding to the number patterns. However, the three-dimensional image left effect pattern 8L, the three-dimensional image middle effect pattern 8C, and the three-dimensional image right effect pattern 8R are not the effect patterns of the card type, but the numbers (number "1" to number "9"). may be configured. In this case, the size of the production pattern composed of the number patterns is the same (including substantially the same) as the size of the card-type production pattern.

[Modification 9]
The display effect B by the effect device in FIG. 78 was performed by attaching an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member, which is a transparent flat plate member, to the game board 2 . However, instead of this, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless transparent member, which is a transparent flat plate member, may be attached to the central opening of the front frame 53 . When the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the game board 2, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is one to two times larger than the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as described above. Since it is formed relatively small, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but covers a part of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is larger than the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it becomes large, it will cover the entire area of the display screen 7a.

Therefore, when the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is slightly larger than the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is formed to be about twice as small as it is so that it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a but covers a part of the display screen 7a. By doing this, the first image (for example, in FIG. 78(C) City image HG1, left effect pattern 8L during variable effect (variable display), middle effect symbol 8C during variable effect (variable display), right effect symbol 8R during variable effect (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, reserved icon 9A, etc.) are made visible through an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), and an image corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device). The second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (for example, in FIG. 78(C), the city image HG1, the right effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display)) is displayed on the decorative member 10 ( It is possible to make it difficult to see through the second effect device). According to this configuration, of the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device). On the other hand, since the second image can be made invisible through the decorative member 10 (second effect device), the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Even if there is, it can be provided to the player as an image with a different impression through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) and the decorative member 10 (second effect device).

[Modification 10]
The display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. may have been added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images on a display screen, and displaying a set of performance symbols capable of informing a lottery result on the display screen,
A first rendering device is arranged in front of the display screen so as to cover a part of the display screen,
A second effect device is arranged at a position different from the first effect device so as to cover a part of the display screen,
The image displayed on the display screen can be rendered visible via the first effect device, and the image displayed on the display screen can be rendered invisible via the second effect device. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
The effect makes the first image displayed in the area of the display screen corresponding to the rear of the first effect device visible through the first effect device, and corresponds to the rear of the second effect device. making the second image displayed in the area of the display screen difficult to see through the second effect device;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
The first effect device has a first light emitting means,
The effect makes the first image visible through the first effect device when the first light emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2 or aspect E1-3,
The second effect device has a second light emitting means,
The effect makes the second image difficult to see through the second effect device regardless of whether or not the second light emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4,
The second effect device is capable of displaying a third image different from the second image,
The effect makes the third image visible when the second light emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
At least one of the first effect device and the second effect device is provided on a movable body that moves between a retracted position and an advanced position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the game machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Moreover, although the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko game machine as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). At least a part of the display effects performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (relevant pending icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 20, 30 First start port 21 Second start port 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Effect control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a special game when a predetermined lottery is won, and shifts to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player with the special game as a trigger,
In the middle of the special game, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the number of times of continuation, which is the number of times the advantageous game state continues, and
In the notification effect, an increase in the numerical value until the number of continuations is reached is displayed using a meter image, and a meter image enlargement effect for enlarging the meter image is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images